GNU Mailutils

Short Table of Contents

Table of Contents

This edition of the GNU Mailutils Manual, last updated on 14 December 2010, documents GNU Mailutils Version 2.2.

1. Introduction

GNU Mailutils is a rich and powerful protocol-independent mail framework. It contains a series of useful mail libraries, clients, and servers. These are the primary mail utilities for the GNU system. The central library is capable of handling electronic mail in various mailbox formats and protocols, both local and remote. Specifically, this project contains a POP3 server, an IMAP4 server, and a Sieve mail filter. It also provides a POSIX `mailx' client, and a collection of other handy tools.

The GNU Mailutils libraries supply an ample set of primitives for handling electronic mail in programs written in C, C++, Python or Scheme.

At the core of Mailutils is libmailutils, a library which provides universal access to various mailboxes and protocols: UNIX mailbox, Maildir, MH, POP3, IMAP4, Sendmail, SMTP. Mailutils offers functions for almost any mail-related task, such as parsing of messages, email addresses and URLs, handling MIME messages, listing mail folders, mailcap facilities, extensible Sieve filtering, access control lists. It supports various modern data security and authentication techniques: TLS encryption, SASL and GSSAPI, to name a few. The framework is able to work with a wide variety of authorization databases, ranging from traditional system password database up to RADIUS, SQL and LDAP.

The utilities provided by Mailutils include imap4d and pop3d mail servers, mail reporting utility comsatd, general-purpose mail delivery agent maidag, mail filtering program sieve, and an implementation of MH message handling system.

All utilities share the same subset of command line options and use a unified configuration mechanism, which allows to easily configure the package as a whole.

This software is part of the GNU Project and is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation. All libraries are distributed under the terms of the Lesser GNU Public License. The documentation is licensed under the GNU FDL, and everything else is licensed under the GNU GPL.

1.1 What this Book Contains

This book addresses a wide audience of both system administrators and users that aim to use Mailutils programs, and programmers who wish to use Mailutils libraries in their programs. Given this audience, the book is divided in three major parts.

The first part provides a detailed description of each Mailutils utility, and advices on how to use them in various situations. This part is intended for users and system administrators who are using Mailutils programs. If you are not interested in programming using Mailutils, this is the only part you need to read.

Subsequent parts address programmers.

The second part is a tutorial which provides an introduction to programming techniques for writing mail applications using GNU Mailutils.

Finally, the third part contains a complete Mailutils library reference.

This version of the book is not finished. The places that may contain inaccurate information carry prominent notices stating so. For updated versions of the documentation, visit http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils/manual. If you have any questions, feel free to ask them at the mailing list bug-mailutils@gnu.org.

1.2 A bit of History, and why use this package?

(The information in this node may be obsolete or otherwise inaccurate. This message will disappear, once this node revised.)

This package started off to try and handle large mailbox files more gracefully then current POP3 servers did. While it handles this task, it also allows you to support a variety of different mailbox formats without any real effort on your part. Also, if a new format is added at a later date, your program will support that new format automatically as soon as it is compiled against the new library.

2. Mailutils Programs

GNU Mailutils provides a broad set of utilities for handling electronic mail. These utilities address the needs of both system administrators and users.

All utilities are built around a single core subsystem and share many common aspects. All of them are able to work with almost any existing mailbox formats. They use a common configuration file syntax, and their configuration files are located in a single subdirectory.

In this chapter we will discuss each utility, and give some advices on how to use them in various real life situations.

First of all we will describe command line and configuration file syntax.

2.1 Command Line

2.1.1 Basic Notions About Command Line Options

Many command line options have two forms, called short and long forms. Both forms are absolutely identical in function; they are interchangeable.

The short form is a traditional form for UNIX utilities. In this form, the option consists of a single dash, followed by a single letter, e.g. ‘-c’.

Short options which require arguments take their arguments immediately following the option letter, optionally separated by white space. For example, you might write ‘-f name’, or ‘-fname’. Here, ‘-f’ is the option, and ‘name’ is its argument.

Short options which allow optional arguments take their arguments immediately following the option letter, without any intervening white space characters. This is important, so that the command line parser might discern that the text following option is its argument, not the next command line parameter. For example, if option ‘-d’ took an optional argument, then ‘-dname’ would mean the option with its argument (‘name’ in this case), and ‘-d name’ would mean the ‘-d’ option without any argument, followed by command line argument ‘name’.

Short options' letters may be clumped together, but you are not required to do this. When short options are clumped as a set, use one (single) dash for them all, e.g. ‘-cvl’ is equivalent to ‘-c -v -l’. However, only options that do not take arguments may be clustered this way. If an option takes an argument, it can only be the last option in such a cluster, otherwise it would be impossible to specify the argument for it. Anyway, it is much more readable to specify such options separated.

The long option names are probably easier to memorize than their short counterparts. They consist of two dashes, followed by a multi-letter option name, which is usually selected to be a mnemonics for the operation it requests. For example, ‘--verbose’ is a long option that increases the verbosity of a utility. In addition, long option names can abbreviated, provided that such an abbreviation is unique among the options understood by a given utility. For example, if a utility takes options ‘--foreground’ and ‘--forward’, then the shortest possible abbreviations for these options are ‘--fore’ and ‘--forw’, correspondingly. If you try to use ‘--for’, the utility will abort and inform you that the abbreviation you use is ambiguous, so it is not clear which of the options you intended to use.

Long options which require arguments take those arguments following the option name. There are two ways of specifying a mandatory argument. It can be separated from the option name either by an equal sign, or by any amount of white space characters. For example, if the ‘--file’ option requires an argument, and you wish to supply ‘name’ as its argument, then you can do so using any of the following notations: ‘--file=name’ or ‘--file name’.

In contrast, optional arguments must always be introduced using an equal sign.

2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.

All GNU Mailutils programs understand a common subset of options.

--help
-?

Display a short summary of the command line options understood by this utilities, along with a terse description of each.

The output of this option consists of three major parts. First, a usage synopsis is displayed. For example:

 
Usage: sieve [OPTION...] SCRIPT
GNU sieve -- a mail filtering tool

The first line tells that the sieve utility takes any number of options (brackets indicate optional part) and a single mandatory argument (‘SCRIPT’). The second lines summarizes the purpose of the utility.

Following this header is an option summary. It consists of two columns:

  -c, --compile-only         Compile script and exit
  -d, --debug[=FLAGS]        Debug flags
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address

The leftmost column contains a comma-separated list of option names. Short options are listed first. The options are ordered alphabetically. Arguments, if any, are specified after the last option name in the list, so that, e.g. the option ‘-e’ in the example above requires an argument: ‘-e ADDRESS’. Optional arguments are enclosed in square brackets, as in ‘--debug’ option in the example above.

The rightmost column contains a short description of the option purpose.

The last part of ‘--help’ output contains some additional notices and lists the email address for reporting bugs.

--usage

Display a short summary of options. In the contrast to the ‘--help’ option, only option names and arguments are printed, without any textual description. For example:

 
Usage: sieve [-cv?V] [--compile-only] [--debug[=FLAGS]]
             [--email=ADDRESS] SCRIPT

The exact formatting of the output produced by these two options is configurable. See section Configuring Help Summary, for a detailed descriptions of it.

--version
-V

Print program version and exit.

--show-config-options

Show configuration options used when compiling the package. You can use this option to verify if support for a particular mailbox format or other functionality is compiled in the binary. The output of this option is intended to be both machine-readable and understandable by humans.

The following command line options affect parsing of configuration files. Here we provide a short summary, the next section will describe them in detail.

--config-file=file

Load this configuration file, instead of the default.

--config-help

Show configuration file summary.

--config-lint

Check configuration file syntax and exit

--config-verbose

Verbosely log parsing of the configuration files.

--no-site-config

Do not load site-wide configuration file.

--no-user-config

Do not load user configuration file.

2.2 Mailutils Configuration File

Configuration files are the principal means of configuring any GNU Mailutils component. When started, each utility tries to load its configuration from the following locations, in that order:

  1. Main site-wide configuration file.

    It is named ‘sysconfdir/mailutils.rc’, where sysconfdir stands for the system configuration directory set when compiling the package. You can obtain the value of sysconfdir by running

     
    $ mailutils-config --info sysconfdir
    

    or

     
    $ prog --show-config-options | grep SYSCONFDIR
    

    where prog stands for any GNU Mailutils utility.

    The site-wide configuration file is not read if the ‘--no-site-config’ command line option was given.

  2. Per-user configuration file.

    A per user configuration file is located in the user home directory and is named ‘.prog’, where prog is the name of the utility. For example, the per-user configuration file for sieve utility is named ‘.sieve’.

    This configuration file is not read if the ‘--no-user-config’ command line option was given.

  3. Additional configuration file, if specified using the ‘--config-file’ command line option.

The order in which configuration files are loaded defines the precedence of their settings. Thus, the settings from additional configuration file override those set in per-user configuration file. The latter, in their turn, take precedence over the settings from the site-wide configuration file.

Neither site-wide nor user configuration files are required to exist. If any or both of them are absent, GNU Mailutils does not complain, and the utility falls back to its default settings. To make configuration processing more verbose, use the ‘--config-verbose’ command line option. Here is an example of what you might get using this option:

 
imap4d: Info: parsing file `/etc/mailutils.rc'
imap4d: Info: finished parsing file `/etc/mailutils.rc'

Specifying this option more than once adds more verbosity to this output. If this option is given two times, GNU Mailutils will print any configuration file statement it parsed, along with the exact location where it occurred (the exact meaning of each statement will be described later in this chapter):

 
imap4d: Info: parsing file `/etc/mailutils.rc'
# 1 "/etc/mailutils.rc"
mailbox {
# 2 "/etc/mailutils.rc"
  mailbox-pattern maildir:/var/spool/mail;type=index;param=2;user=${user};
# 3 "/etc/mailutils.rc"
  mailbox-type maildir;
};
# 6 "/etc/mailutils.rc"
include /etc/mailutils.d;
imap4d: Info: parsing file `/etc/mailutils.d/imap4d'
...

To test configuration file without actually starting the utility, use the ‘--config-lint’ command line option. With this option, any Mailutils utility exits after finishing parsing of the configuration files. Any errors occurred during parsing are displayed on the standard error output. This option can be combined with ‘--config-verbose’ to obtain more detailed output.

The ‘--config-help’ command line option produces on the standard output the summary of all configuration statements understood by the utility, with detailed comments and in the form suitable for configuration file. For example, the simplest way to write a configuration file for, say, imap4d is to run

 
$ imap4d --config-help > imap4d.rc

and to edit the ‘imap4d.rc’ file with your editor of choice.

2.2.1 Configuration File Syntax

Configuration files consist of a series of statements. Blanks, tabs, newlines and comments, collectively called white space are ignored except as they serve to separate tokens. Some white space is required to separate otherwise adjacent keywords and values.

2.2.1.1 Comments

Comments may appear anywhere where white space may appear in the configuration file. There are two kinds of comments: single-line and multi-line comments. Single-line comments start with ‘#’ or ‘//’ and continue to the end of the line:

 
# This is a comment
// This too is a comment

Multi-line or C-style comments start with the two characters ‘/*’ (slash, star) and continue until the first occurrence of ‘*/’ (star, slash).

Multi-line comments cannot be nested. However, single-line comments are allowed to appear within a multi-line one.

2.2.1.2 Statements

A simple statement, consists of a keyword and value separated by any amount of whitespace. Simple statement is terminated with a semicolon (‘;’), unless it contains a here-document (see below), in which case semicolon is optional.

Examples of simple statements:

 
pidfile /var/run/imap4d.pid;
transcript yes;

A keyword begins with a letter and may contain letters, decimal digits, underscores (‘_’) and dashes (‘-’). Examples of keywords are: ‘group’, ‘identity-check’.

A value can be one of the following:

number

A number is a sequence of decimal digits.

boolean

A boolean value is one of the following: ‘yes’, ‘true’, ‘t’ or ‘1’, meaning true, and ‘no’, ‘false’, ‘nil’, ‘0’ meaning false.

unquoted string

An unquoted string may contain letters, digits, and any of the following characters: ‘_’, ‘-’, ‘.’, ‘/’, ‘:’.

quoted string

A quoted string is any sequence of characters enclosed in double-quotes (‘"’). A backslash appearing within a quoted string introduces an escape sequence, which is replaced with a single character according to the following rules:

Sequence Replaced with
\a Audible bell character (ASCII 7)
\b Backspace character (ASCII 8)
\f Form-feed character (ASCII 12)
\n Newline character (ASCII 10)
\r Carriage return character (ASCII 13)
\t Horizontal tabulation character (ASCII 9)
\\ A single backslash (‘\’)
\" A double-quote.

Table 2.1: Backslash escapes

In addition, the sequence ‘\newline’ is removed from the string. This allows to split long strings over several physical lines, e.g.:

 
"a long string may be\
 split over several lines"

If the character following a backslash is not one of those specified above, the backslash is ignored and a warning is issued.

Two or more adjacent quoted strings are concatenated, which gives another way to split long strings over several lines to improve readability. The following fragment produces the same result as the example above:

 
"a long string may be"
" split over several lines"

Here-document

Here-document is a special construct that allows to introduce strings of text containing embedded newlines.

The <<word construct instructs the parser to read all the lines that follow up to the line containing only word, with possible trailing blanks. Any lines thus read are concatenated together into a single string. For example:

 
<<EOT
A multiline
string
EOT

Body of a here-document is interpreted the same way as double-quoted string, unless word is preceded by a backslash (e.g. ‘<<\EOT’) or enclosed in double-quotes, in which case the text is read as is, without interpretation of escape sequences.

If word is prefixed with - (a dash), then all leading tab characters are stripped from input lines and the line containing word. Furthermore, if - is followed by a single space, all leading whitespace is stripped from them. This allows to indent here-documents in a natural fashion. For example:

 
<<- TEXT
    All leading whitespace will be
    ignored when reading these lines.
TEXT

It is important that the terminating delimiter be the only token on its line. The only exception to this rule is allowed if a here-document appears as the last element of a statement. In this case a semicolon can be placed on the same line with its terminating delimiter, as in:

 
help-text <<-EOT
        A sample help text.
EOT;

However, terminated semicolon after a here-document is optional.

list

A list is a comma-separated list of values. Lists are enclosed in parentheses. The following example shows a statement whose value is a list of strings:

 
shared-namespace ("/home", "/var/spool/common");

In any case where a list is appropriate, a single value is allowed without being a member of a list: it is equivalent to a list with a single member. This means that, e.g. ‘shared-namespace /home;’ is equivalent to ‘shared-namespace (/home);’.

2.2.1.3 Block Statements

A block statement introduces a logical group of another statements. It consists of a keyword, followed by an optional value, and a sequence of statements enclosed in curly braces, as shown in example below:

 
tcp-wrappers {
  enable yes;
  allow-syslog-priority info;
  deny-syslog-priority notice;
}

The closing curly brace may be followed by a semicolon, although this is not required.

2.2.2 Include Statement

An include statement is a special statement that causes inclusion of a named file. This statement has the following syntax:

 
include file;

If file names a regular file, the contents of this file is included in this point. Otherwise, if file names a directory, Mailutils searches in that directory for a file whose name coincides with the name of utility being executed, and includes this file, if it exists.

It is a common approach to end the site-wide configuration file with an include statement, e.g.:

 
include /etc/mailutils.d;

This allows each particular utility to have its own configuration file. Thus. imap4d will read ‘/etc/mailutils.d/imap4d’, etc.

2.2.3 Logging Statement

Syntax

 
logging {
  # Set syslog facility.
  facility name;
  # Tag syslog messages with this string.
  tag text;
}

Description

The logging block statement provides configuration for programs that use syslog for diagnostics. The default syslog facility is determined at compile time, it can be inspected using the following command:

 
$ mailutils-config --info log_facility

Configuration: facility name

Use syslog facility name. Valid argument values are: ‘user’, ‘daemon’, ‘auth’, ‘authpriv’, ‘mail’, ‘cron’, ‘local0’ through ‘local7’ (all names case-insensitive), or a facility number.

Configuration: tag text

Tag syslog messages with text. By default, program name is used as syslog tag.

2.2.4 Debug Statement

Syntax

 
debug {
  # Set Mailutils debugging level.
  level spec;
  # Prefix debug messages with Mailutils source locations.
  line-info bool;
}

Description

The debug statement configures debugging output. Although it is mostly useful for Mailutils developers, it may be of interest for casual users as well. In particular, you may use it to obtain more information about Mailutils actions, which may help in configuring it, or in filling a bug report.

Debugging output is controlled by a set of levels, each of which can be enabled or disabled independently of others. A debugging level consists of a module name, which defines a Mailutils module affected by this level, and a level number, which defines the verbosity of the debugging output. Valid debugging levels are:

error

Display only error messages.

trace0 through trace7

Eight levels of verbosity, ‘trace0’ producing less output, ‘trace7’ producing maximum possible output.

prot

Display network protocol interactions, where appropriate.

Table 2: Debugging levels

The most important debugging modules are:

acl

Debug access control lists. .

config

Debug configuration parser and/or lexical analyzer. The following levels are supported:

trace0

Minimal information about configuration statements.

trace2

Trace lexical structure of the configuration files.

trace7

Trace execution of the configuration parser.

Due to its specific nature, this debugging module cannot be enabled using level statement below. The ‘--debug-level’ command line option should be used instead (). Alternatively, you may use the following hook, provided to facilitate debugging of the configuration parser: a pragmatic comment in form:

 
#debug=level

is understood as a request to set debugging level of module ‘config’ to level.

ip_server

IP based servers, such as imap4d and pop3d. This module supports ‘trace0’ and ‘error’ levels. See section Server Settings, for more information about servers.

udp_server

UDP based servers, such as comsatd. This module supports ‘trace0’ and ‘error’ levels. See section Server Settings, for more information about servers.

mailbox

Operations over mailboxes. This module supports the following levels: ‘error’, ‘trace0’, ‘trace1’, and ‘proto’. The latter is used by remote mailbox support libraries.

sieve

Debug Sieve parser and run-time evaluator. Currently supported levels are ‘error’, ‘trace1’ and ‘trace7’.

Configuration: level spec

This statement enables debugging levels given by spec. The argument is an list of debugging specifications or a string with specifications delimited by semicolons. The syntax of a specification is:

 
  module[[:]=level]

where module is the name of a module, and level is the level to be set. The level may be optionally prefixed with the following symbols:

!

All levels except this one. E.g. ‘config=!trace7’ means set all debugging levels, except ‘trace7’ for the ‘config’ module.

<

All levels up to and including this. The words ‘up to’ refer to the position of levels in debugging levels table, so that, e.g. ‘<trace2’ means levels ‘error’, ‘trace0’, ‘trace1’ and ‘trace2’.

Both prefixes can be used together, in this order: ‘!<’. This means all levels except this one and ones listed before it in the table.

A comma before equal sign, as in ‘mailbox:=<trace7’ means set this debugging levels in all modules, invoked by this one.

The level in the level specification can also be a comma-separated list of valid levels, e.g.:

 
   mailbox=<trace2,!<trace4

which means “levels trace3 and trace4”.

The following example illustrates two equivalent ways of setting debugging level in a configuration file:

 
  level ("mailbox=!proto", "acl=<trace7");
  level "mailbox=!proto;acl=<trace7";

The ‘--debug-level’ command line option overrides the settings of the level configuration statement.

Configuration: line-info bool

If bool is ‘true’ (see boolean value), each debugging message will be preceded by a corresponding source file location, i.e. the file name and line number where this message was generated.

2.2.5 Mailbox Statement

Syntax

 
mailbox {
  # Use specified url as a mailspool.
  mail-spool url;
  # Create mailbox url using pattern.
  mailbox-pattern pattern;
  # Default mailbox type.
  mailbox-type type;
  # Default user mail folder.
  folder dir;
}

Description

The mailbox statement configures the location, name and type of user mailboxes.

The mailbox location can be specified using mail-spool or mail-pattern statements.

Configuration: mail-spool path

The mail-spool statement specifies directory that holds user mailboxes. Once this statement is given, the libmailutils library will assume that the mailbox of user login is kept in file ‘path/login’.

Historically, path can contain mailbox type prefix, e.g.: ‘maildir:///var/spool/mail’, but such usage is discouraged in favor of mailbox-pattern statement.

Configuration: mailbox-pattern pattern

The mailbox-pattern statement is a modern way of configuring mailbox locations. It supersedes mail-spool statement.

The pattern is valid mailbox URL, which may contain references to ‘user’ macro-variable (). This macro-variable will be expanded to the actual user name. The full syntax for pattern is:

 
  [type://]path[;args]

where:

type

Specifies the mailbox type. It must be one of mailbox types, supported by Mailutils. . By default, ‘local’ is assumed. .

path

The path pattern.

args

A semicolon-separated list of optional arguments, configuring indexed directory structure.

An indexed directory structure is a special way of storing mailboxes, which allows for faster access in case of very large number of users.

By default, all user mailboxes are stored in a single directory and are named after user login names. To find the mailbox for a given user, the system scans the directory for the corresponding file. This usually implies linear search, so the time needed to locate a mailbox is directly proportional to the ordinal number of the mailbox in the directory.

GNU Mailutils supports three types of indexed directories: ‘direct’, ‘reverse’, and ‘hashed’.

In direct indexed directory structure, path contains 26 subdirectories named with lower-case letters of Latin alphabet. The location of the user mailbox is determined using the following algorithm:

  1. Take the first letter of the user name.
  2. Map it to a lower-case letter using index mapping table. The result gives sub-directory name.
  3. Descend into this directory.

For example, using this algorithm, the mailbox of the user ‘smith’ is stored in file ‘path/s/smith’.

If each of single-letter subdirectories contains the indexed directory structure, we have second level of indexing. In this case the file name of ‘smith’'s mailbox is ‘path/s/m/smith’.

The reverse indexed structure uses the same principles, but the indexing letters are taken from the end of the user name, instead of from the beginning. For example, in the 2nd level reverse indexed structure, the ‘smith’'s mailbox is located in ‘path/h/t/smith’.

Finally, the hashed structure consists of 256 subdirectories under path, named by 2-letter hex codes from ‘00’ to ‘FF’. Mailboxes are stored in these subdirectories. The name of the subdirectory is computed by hashing first level letters of the user name. The hashing algorithm is:

  1. Take next letter from the user name
  2. Add its ASCII value to the hash sum.
  3. Continue (1-2) until level letters are processed, or all letters from the file name are used, whichever occurs first.
  4. Convert the computed sum modulo 256 to a hex code.

Indexed directory structures are configured using the following arguments:

type=value

Specifies type of indexing. Valid values are ‘index’, for direct indexed structure, ‘rev-index’ for reverse indexing, and ‘hash’ for hashed structure.

param=number

Specifies indexing level.

user=string

Specifies indexing key. The only meaningful value, as of Mailutils version 2.2 is ‘user=${user}’.

Let's assume the traditional mail layout, in which user incoming mails are stored in UNIX mailbox format in ‘/var/mail’ directory. The mailbox-pattern for this case is:

 
  mailbox-pattern "/var/mail/${user}";

It is entirely equivalent to specifying ‘mail-spool "/var/mail"’.

Now, if the layout is the same, but mailboxes are kept in ‘maildir’ format, then the corresponding statement is:

 
  mailbox-pattern "maildir:///var/mail/${user}";

Finally, if the mailboxes are stored in a directly-indexed directory with two levels of indexing, than:

 
  mailbox-pattern "maildir:///var/mail;type=index;param=2;user=${user}";

If neither mailbox-pattern nor mail-spool are given, the mailbox names are determined using the following algorithm:

  1. If environment variable FOLDER its value is used.
  2. Otherwise, if environment variable MAIL is set, its value is used.
  3. If neither of these is set, the mailbox name is constructed by concatenating the built-in mail spool directory name, a directory separator, and the user name.

    The built-in mail spool directory name is determined at compile time, using ‘_PATH_MAILDIR’ define from the include file ‘paths.h’. If this value is not defined, ‘/var/mail’ or ‘/usr/spool/mail’ is used.

Configuration: mailbox-type type

Specifies type of mailboxes. By default, ‘mbox’ (UNIX mailbox) is assumed. This can be changed while configuring the package by setting MU_DEFAULT_SCHEME configuration variable. The default value can be verified by running mailutils-config --info scheme.

Configuration: folder dir

Sets user mail folder directory. Its value is using when expanding ‘plus-notation’, i.e. such mailbox names as ‘+inbox’. The ‘+’ sign is replaced by dir, followed by a directory separator (‘/’).

The dir argument can contain mailbox type prefix, e.g ‘mh://Mail’.

The default folder name is ‘Mail/’.

2.2.6 Locking Statement

Syntax

 
locking {
  # Default locker flags.
  flags arg;
  # Set timeout for acquiring the lock.
  retry-timeout arg;
  # Set the maximum number of times to retry acquiring the lock.
  retry-count number;
  # Expire locks older than this amount of time.
  expire-timeout number;
  # Use prog as external locker program.
  external-locker prog;
}

Description

This block statement configures various parameters used when locking UNIX mailboxes in order to prevent simultaneous writes.

It is important to note, that locking applies only to maildrops in UNIX mailbox format. All other mailbox types do not require locking.

Configuration: flags string

Set locking flags. Argument is a string consisting of one or more of the following letters:

E

Use an external program to manage locks. The program is given by external-locker statement (see below).

R

If the locking attempt failed, retry it. This is the default. The number of retries, and time interval between the two successive attempts is given by retry-count and retry-timeout statements, correspondingly.

T

If a lock file exists, check its modification time and, if it is older than a predefined amount of time, remove the lock. The amount of time is specified by expire-timeout statement.

P

Store the PID of the locking process in a lock file.

Configuration: retry-count number

Number of locking attempts. The ‘P’ flag must be set for this to take effect.

Configuration: retry-timeout seconds

Time interval, in seconds, between the two successive locking attempts. The ‘P’ flag must be set for this to take effect.

Configuration: expire-timeout seconds

Remove existing lock file, if it is created more than this number of seconds ago. The ‘T’ flag must be set for this to take effect.

Configuration: external-locker string

Set command line of an external locker program. The ‘E’ flag must be set for this to take effect.

2.2.7 Mailer Statement

Syntax

 
mailer {
  url url;
}

Description

A mailer is a special logical entity GNU Mailutils uses for sending messages. Its internal representation is discussed in Mailer. The mailer statement configures it.

The mailer statement contains a single sub-statement:

Configuration: url str

Set the mailer URL.

GNU Mailutils supports two types of mailer URLs, described in the table below. As usual, square brackets indicate optional parts:

smtp://host[:port]

Use an SMTP server host to send messages. Optional port specifies port number or symbolic name (as defined in ‘/etc/services’). It defaults to 25. The host can be specified as either an IP address in dotted-quad notation or as a symbolic host name. In the latter case, DNS system will be used to resolve it.

sendmail://progname

Use sendmail-compatible program progname. Sendmail-compatible means that the program must support following command line options:

-oi

Do not treat ‘.’ as message terminator.

-f addr

Use addr as the sender address.

-t

Get recipient addresses from the message.

sendmail:

This is a special form of the ‘sendmail’ mailer. It uses the sendmail binary from the _PATH_SENDMAIL macro in your ‘/usr/include/paths.h’. It is the default mailer.

prog://progname?query

A prog mailer. This is a generalization of ‘sendmail’ mailer that allows to use arbitrary external programs as mailers.

The progname must be a full pathname of the binary file. When sending message, Mailutils will invoke this file with the arguments specified by query and will pipe the message to be sent to its standard input.

The query part is a list of arguments, separated by ‘&’ signs. Arguments may contain the following macro-substitutions:

${sender}

Expands to the sender email address.

${rcpt}

Expands to the recipient email addresses.

2.2.8 ACL Statement

Syntax

 
acl {
  # Allow connections from this IP address.
  allow [from] ip;
  # Deny connections from this IP address.
  deny [from] ip;
  # Log connections from this IP address.
  log [from] ip [string];
  /* Execute supplied program if a connection from this
     IP address is requested. */
  exec [from] ip program;
  /* Use program to decide whether to allow connection
     from ip. */
  ifexec [from] ip program;
}

Description

The ACL statement defines an Access Control List, a special structure that controls who can access the given Mailutils resource.

The acl block contains a list of access controls. Each control can be regarded as a function that returns a tree-state value: ‘True’, ‘False’ and ‘Don't know’. When a remote party connects to the server, each of controls is tried in turn. If a control returns ‘False’, access is denied. If it returns ‘True’, access is allowed. If it returns ‘Don't know’, then the next control is tried. It is unclear whether to allow access if the last control in list returned ‘Don't know’. GNU Mailutils 2.2 issues a warning message and allows access. This default may change in future versions. Users are advised to write their ACLs so that the last control returns a definitive answer (either True or False).

In the discussion below, wherever ip appears as an argument, it can be replaced by any of:

The following controls are understood:

Configuration: allow [from] cidr

Allow connections from IP addresses matching this cidr block.

Configuration: deny [from] cidr

Deny connections from IP addresses matching this cidr block.

Configuration: ifexec [from] cidr program

When a connection from the cidr block is requested, execute the program program. If its exit code is ‘0’, then allow connection. Otherwise, deny it.

The following two controls are provided for logging purposes and as a means of extensions. They always return a ‘Don't know’ answer, and therefore should not be used at the end of an ACL:

Configuration: log [from] cidr [string]

Log connections from addresses in this cidr. The MU_DIAG_INFO channel is used. If the logging goes to syslog, it is translated to the LOG_INFO priority.

If string is not given, the format of the log entry depends on the connection family, as described in the table below:

{AF_INET ip:port}

For inet IPv4 connections. The variables ip and port are replaced by the remote IP address and port number, correspondingly.

{AF_UNIX}

For connections over UNIX sockets. The socket name, if available, may be printed before the closing curly brace.

If the string is specified, it undergoes macro expansion and the result of it is used as the log entry. The following macro variables are expanded:

aclno

Ordinal number of the control in the ACL. Numbers begin from ‘0’.

family

Connection family. Mailutils version 2.2 supports two families: ‘AF_INET’ and ‘AF_UNIX’.

address

Remote IP address (for ‘AF_INET’) or socket name (for ‘AF_UNIX’). Notice that most Unixes return empty string instead of the ‘AF_UNIX’ socket name, so do not rely on it.

port

Remote port number (for ‘AF_INET’).

For example, the following ACL makes a Mailutils server log every incoming connection:

 
  acl {
     log from any "Connect from ${address}";
     ...
  }

This was the default behavior for the versions of Mailutils up to ‘1.2’, so if you got used to its logs you might wish to add the above in your configuration files.

Configuration: exec [from] cidr program

If a connection from the cidr block is requested, execute the given program. Do not wait for it to terminate, and ignore its exit code.

2.2.9 Tcp-wrappers Statement

Syntax

 
tcp-wrappers {
  # Enable TCP wrapper access control.
  enable bool;
  # Set daemon name for TCP wrapper lookups.
  daemon name;
  # Use file for positive client address access control.
  allow-table file;
  # Use file for negative client address access control.
  deny-table file;
  # Log allowed accesses at this syslog priority.
  allow-syslog-priority prio;
  # Log denied accesses at this syslog priority.
  deny-syslog-priority prio;
}

2.2.10 Description

The tcp-wrappers statements provides an alternative way to control accesses to the resources served by GNU Mailutils. This statement is enabled if Mailutils is compiled with TCP wrappers library libwrap.

Access control using TCP wrappers is based on two files, called tables, containing access rules. There are two tables: the allow table, usually stored in file ‘/etc/hosts.allow’, and the deny table, kept in file ‘/etc/hosts.deny’. The rules in each table begin with an identifier called daemon name. Each utility wishing to verify a connection, select the entries having its daemon name from the allow table. A connection is allowed if it matches any of these entries. Otherwise, the utility retrieves all entries with its daemon name from the deny table. If any of these matches the connection, then it is refused. Otherwise, if neither table contains matching entries, the connection is allowed.

Description of a TCP wrapper table format lies outside the scope of this document. Please, see (hosts_access(5))ACCESS CONTROL FILES section `ACCESS CONTROL FILES' in hosts_access(5) man page, for details.

Configuration: enable bool

Enable access control using TCP wrappers. It is on by default.

Configuration: daemon name

Set daemon name for TCP wrapper lookups. By default, the name of the utility is used. E.g. imap4d uses ‘imap4d’ as the daemon name.

Configuration: allow-table file

Use file as allow table. By default, ‘/etc/hosts.allow’ is used.

Configuration: deny-table file

Use file as negative table. By default, ‘/etc/hosts.deny’ is used.

Configuration: allow-syslog-priority prio;

Log allowed accesses using syslog priority prio.

Configuration: deny-syslog-priority prio;

Log denied accesses using syslog priority prio.

2.2.11 Server Settings

GNU Mailutils offers several server applications: pop3d, imap4d, comsatd, to name a few. Being quite different in their purpose, they are very similar in some aspects of their architecture. First of all, they all support two operating mode: a daemon mode, where a program disconnects from the controlling terminal and works in background, and an inetd mode, where it remains in foreground and communicates with the remote party via standard input and output streams. Secondly, when operating as daemons, they listen to a preconfigured set of IP addresses and ports, reacting to requests that arrive.

To configure these aspects of functionality, GNU Mailutils provides Server Configuration Settings, which we will describe in this subsection.

2.2.11.1 General Server Configuration

Syntax

 
# Set daemon mode.
mode ‘inetd|daemon’;
# Run in foreground.
foreground bool;
# Maximum number of children processes to run simultaneously.
max-children number;
# Store PID of the master process in file.
pidfile file;
# Default port number.
port portspec;
# Set idle timeout.
timeout time;

Description

These statements configure general server-related issues.

Configuration: mode string;

Set operation mode of the server. Two operation modes are supported:

daemon

Run as a standalone daemon, disconnecting from the controlling terminal and continuing to run in the background. In this case, it is the server that controls what IP addresses and ports to listen on, who is allowed to connect and from where, how many clients are allowed to connect simultaneously, etc. Most remaining configuration statements are valid only in the daemon mode.

This is the preferred mode of operation for GNU Mailutils servers.

inetd

Operate as a subprocess of UNIX internet super-server program, inetd. See (inetd(8))Internet super-server section `Internet super-server' in inetd(8) man page, for a detailed description of the operation of inetd and its configuration. In this case it is inetd that controls all major connectivity aspects, the Mailutils server itself communicates with it via standard input and output streams.

For historical reasons, this mode is the default, if no mode statement is specified. This will change in the future.

Configuration: foreground bool;

[daemon mode only]
Do not disconnect from the controlling terminal and remain in the foreground.

Configuration: max-children number;

[daemon mode only]
Set maximum number of child processes allowed to run simultaneously. This equals the number of clients that can use the server simultaneously.

The default is 20 clients.

Configuration: pidfile file;

After startup, store the PID of the main server process in file. When the process terminates, the file is removed. As of version 2.2, GNU Mailutils servers make no further use of this file. It is intended for use by automated startup scripts and controlling programs ().

Configuration: port portspec;

[daemon mode only]
Set default port to listen to. The portspec argument is either a port number in decimal, or a symbolic service name, as listed in ‘/etc/services’ (see (services(5))Internet network services list section `Internet network services list' in services(5) man page).

Configuration: timeout time;

Set maximum idle time out in seconds. If a client does not send any requests during time seconds, the child process terminates.

2.2.11.2 Server Statement

Syntax

 
server ipaddr[:port] {
  # Run this server as a single process.
  single-process bool;
  # Log the session transcript.
  transcript bool;
  # Set idle timeout.
  timeout time;
  # Set server specific ACLs.
  acl { /* See section ACL Statement. */ };
}

Description

The server block statement configures a single TCP or UDP server. It takes effect only in daemon mode (see server mode). The argument to this statement specifies the IP address, and, optionally, the port, to listen on for requests. The ipaddr part is either an IPv4 address in dotted-quad form, or a symbolic host name which can be resolved to such an address via DNS. Specifying ‘0.0.0.0’ as the ipaddr means listen on all available network interfaces. The port argument is either a port number in decimal, or a symbolic service name, as listed in ‘/etc/services’ (see (services(5))Internet network services list section `Internet network services list' in services(5) man page). If port is omitted, Mailutils uses the port set by port statement (see section port), or, in its absence, the default port number, which depends on a server being used (e.g. 110, for pop3d, 143, for imap4d, etc.).

Any number of server statements may be specified in a single configuration file, allowing to set up the same service on several IP addresses and/or port numbers, and with different configurations.

Statements within the server block statement configure this particular server.

Configuration: single-process bool;

If set to true, this server will operate in single-process mode. This mode is intended for debugging only, do not use it on production servers.

Configuration: transcript bool;

Enable transcript of the client-server interaction. This may generate excessive amounts of logging, which in turn may slow down the operation considerably.

Session transcripts are useful in fine-tuning your configurations and in debugging. They should be turned off on most production servers.

Configuration: timeout time;

Set idle timeout for this server. This overrides global timeout settings (see section timeout).

Configuration: acl

This statement defines a per-server Access Control List. Its syntax is as described in ACL Statement. Per-server ACLs complement, but not override, global ACLs, i.e. if both global ACL and per-server ACL are used, the connection is allowed only if both of them allow it, and is denied if any one of them denies it.

2.2.12 Auth Statement

Syntax

 
auth {
  # Set a list of modules for authentication.
  authentication module-list;
  # Set a list of modules for authorization.
  authorization module-list;
}

Description

Some mail utilities provide access to their services only after verifying that the user is actually the person he is claiming to be. Such programs are, for example, pop3d and imap4d. The process of the verification is broken down into two stages: authorization and authentication. In authorization stage the program retrieves the information about a particular user. In authentication stage, this information is compared against the user-supplied credentials. Only if both stages succeed is the user allowed to use the service.

A set of modules is involved in performing each stage. For example, the authorization stage can retrieve the user description from various sources: system database, SQL database, virtual domain table, etc. Each module is responsible for retrieving the description from a particular source of information. The modules are arranged in a module list. The modules from the list are invoked in turn, until one of them succeeds or the list is exhausted. In the latter case the authorization fails. Otherwise, the data returned by the succeeded module are used in authentication.

Similarly, authentication may be performed in several ways. The authentication modules are also grouped in a list. Each module is tried in turn until either a module succeeds, in which case the authentication succeeds, or the end of the list is reached.

For example, the authorization list

 
  (system, sql, virtdomains)

means that first the system user database (‘/etc/password’) is searched for a description of a user in question. If the search fails, the SQL database is searched. Finally, if it also fails, the search is performed in the virtual domain database.

Note, that some authentication and/or authorization modules may be disabled when configuring the package before compilation. The names of the disabled modules are nevertheless available for use in runtime configuration options, but they represent a “fail-only” functionality, e.g. if the package was compiled without SQL support then the module ‘sql’ in the above example will always fail, thus passing the execution on to the next module.

The auth statement configures authentication and authorization.

Configuration: authorization module-list

Define a sequence of modules to use for authorization. Modules will be tried in the same order as listed in module-list.

The modules available for use in authorization list are:

system

User credentials are retrieved from the system user database (‘/etc/password’).

sql

User credentials are retrieved from a SQL database. A separate configuration statement, sql, is used to configure it (see section SQL Statement).

virtdomain

User credentials are retrieved from a “virtual domain” user database. Virtual domains are configured using virtdomain statement (see section Virtdomain Statement).

radius

User credentials are retrieved using RADIUS. See section Radius Statement, for a detailed description on how to configure it.

ldap

User credentials are retrieved from an LDAP database. See section LDAP Statement, for an information on how to configure it.

Unless overridden by authorization statement, the default list of authorization modules is:

 
  (system, sql, virtdomains)
Configuration: authentication module-list

Define a sequence of modules to use for authentication. Modules will be tried in the same order as listed in module-list.

The following table lists modules available for use in module-list:

generic

The generic authentication type. User password is hashed and compared against the hash value returned in authorization stage.

system

The hashed value of the user password is retrieved from ‘/etc/shadow’ file on systems that support it.

sql

The hashed value of the user password is retrieved from a SQL database using query supplied by getpass statement (see section getpass).

pam

The user is authenticated via pluggable authentication module (PAM). The PAM service name to be used is configured in pam statement (see section PAM Statement).

radius

The user is authenticated on a remote RADIUS server. See section Radius Statement.

ldap

The user is authenticated using LDAP. See section LDAP Statement.

Unless overridden by authentication statement, the list of authentication modules is:

 
  (generic, system, pam, sql)

2.2.13 PAM Statement

Syntax

 
pam {
  # Set PAM service name.
  service text;
}

Description

The pam statement configures PAM authentication. It contains a single sub-statement:

Configuration: service text

Define service name to look for in PAM configuration. By default, the base name of the Mailutils binary is used.

This statement takes effect only if ‘pam’ is listed in authentication statement (see section Auth Statement).

2.2.14 Virtdomain Statement

Syntax

 
virtdomain {
  # Name of the virtdomain password directory.
  passwd-dir dir;
}

Description

Virtual mail domains make it possible to handle several mail domains each having a separate set of users, on a single server. The domains are completely independent of each other, i.e. the same user name can be present in several domains and represent different users.

When authenticating to a server with virtual domain support enabled, users must supply their user names with domain parts. The server strips off the domain part and uses it as a name of UNIX-format password database file, located in the domain password directory. The latter is set using passwd-dir statement.

Configuration: passwd-dir dir

Set virtual domain password directory.

For example, when authenticating user ‘smith@domain.tld’, the server will use password file named ‘dir/domain.tld’. This file must be in UNIX passwd format (see (passwd(5))password file section `password file' in passwd(5) man page), with encrypted passwords stored in it (as of GNU Mailutils version 2.2, there is no support for shadow files in virtual password directories, although this is planned for future versions). Here is an example record from this file:

 
smith:Wbld/G2Q2Le2w:1000:1000:Email Account:/var/mail/domain/smith:/dev/null

Notice, that it must contain user names without domain parts.

The pw_dir field (the 6th field) is used to determine the location of the maildrop for this user. It is defined as ‘pw_dir/INBOX’. In our example, the maildrop for user ‘smith’ will be located in file ‘/var/mail/domain/smith’.

If user did not supply his domain name, or if no matching record was found in the password file, or if the file matching the domain name does not exist, then GNU Mailutils falls back to alternative method. First, it tries to determine the IP address of the remote party. Then the domain name corresponding to that address is looked up in the DNS system. Finally, this domain name is used as a name of the password file.

2.2.15 Radius Statement

Syntax

 
radius {
  # Set radius configuration directory.
  directory dir;
  # Radius request for authorization.
  auth request;
  # Radius request for getpwnam.
  getpwnam request;
  # Radius request for getpwuid.
  getpwuid request;
}

Description

The radius block statement configures RADIUS authentication and authorization.

Mailutils uses GNU Radius library, which is configured via ‘raddb/client.conf’ file (see Client Configuration: (radius)client.conf section `Client Configuration' in GNU Radius Reference Manual). Its exact location depends on configuration settings that were used while compiling GNU Radius. Usually it is ‘/usr/local/etc’, or ‘/etc’. This default can also be changed at run time using directory statement:

Configuration: directory dir

Set full path name to the GNU Radius configuration directory.

It authorization is used, the Radius dictionary file must declare the the following attributes:

Attribute Type Description
GNU-MU-User-Name string User login name
GNU-MU-UID integer UID
GNU-MU-GID integer GID
GNU-MU-GECOS string GECOS
GNU-MU-Dir string Home directory
GNU-MU-Shell string User shell
GNU-MU-Mailbox string User mailbox
GNU-MU-Quota integer Mail quota (in bytes)

A dictionary file with appropriate definitions is included in the Mailutils distribution: ‘examples/config/mailutils.dict’. This file is not installed by default, you will have to manually copy it to the GNU Radius ‘raddb/dict’ directory and include it in the main dictionary file ‘raddb/dictionary’ by adding the following statement:

 
$INCLUDE dict/mailutils.dict

Requests to use for authentication and authorization are configured using three statements: auth, getpwnam and getpwuid. Each statement takes a single argument: a string, containing a comma-separated list of assignments. An assignment specifies a particular attribute-value pair (see RADIUS Attributes: (radius)Overview section `Overview' in GNU Radius Reference Manual) to send to the server. The left-hand side of the assignment is a symbolic attribute name, as defined in one of Radius dictionaries (see Dictionary of Attributes: (radius)dictionary file section `dictionary file' in GNU Radius Reference Manual). The value is specified by the right-hand side of assignment. For example:

 
"Service-Type = Authenticate-Only, NAS-Identifier = \"mail\""

An assignment may contain references to the following macro-variables ():

user

The actual user name (for auth and getpwnam), or user ID (for getpwuid). For example:

 
User-Name = ${user}
passwd

User password. For examples:

 
User-Password = ${passwd}
Configuration: auth pairlist

Specifies the request to be sent to authenticate the user. For example:

 
auth "User-Name = ${user}, User-Password = ${passwd}";

The user is authenticated only if this request returns Access-Accept (see Access-Accept: (radius)Authentication Requests section `Authentication Requests' in GNU Radius Reference Manual). Any returned attribute-value pairs are ignored.

Configuration: getpwnam pairlist

Specifies the request that returns user information for the given user name. For example:

 
getpwnam "User-Name = ${user}, State = getpwnam, "
         "Service-Type = Authenticate-Only";

If the requested user account exists, the Radius server must return Access-Accept packet with the following attributes: GNU-MU-User-Name, GNU-MU-UID, GNU-MU-GID, GNU-MU-GECOS, GNU-MU-Dir, GNU-MU-Shell.

The attributes GNU-MU-Mailbox and GNU-MU-Quota are optional.

If GNU-MU-Mailbox is present, it must contain a valid mailbox URL (). If GNU-MU-Mailbox is not present, Mailutils constructs the mailbox name using the settings from the mailbox configuration statement (see section Mailbox Statement), or built-in defaults, if it is not present.

If GNU-MU-Quota is present, it specifies the maximum mailbox size for this user, in bytes. In the absence of this attribute, mailbox size is unlimited.

Configuration: getpwuid pairlist

Specifies the request that returns user information for the given user ID. In pairlist, the ‘user’ macro-variable is expanded to the numeric value of ID. For example:

 
getpwuid "User-Name = ${user}, State = getpwuid, "
         "Service-Type = Authenticate-Only";

The reply to getpwuid request is the same as to getpwnam request (see above).

2.2.16 SQL Statement

(The information in this node may be obsolete or otherwise inaccurate. This message will disappear, once this node revised.)

Syntax

 
sql {
  # Set SQL interface to use.
  interface ‘mysql|odbc|postgres’;
  # SQL server host name.
  host arg;
  # SQL user name.
  user arg;
  # Password for the SQL user.
  passwd arg;
  # SQL server port.
  port arg;
  # Database name.
  db arg;
  # Type of password returned by getpass query.
  password-type ‘plain | hash | scrambled’;
  # Set a field-map for parsing SQL replies.
  field-map map;
  # SQL query returning the user's password.
  getpass query;
  # SQL query to use for getpwnam requests.
  getpwnam query;
  # SQL query to use for getpwuid requests.
  getpwuid query;
}

2.2.17 Description

The sql statement configures access credentials to SQL database and the queries for authentication and authorization.

GNU Mailutils supports three types of SQL interfaces: MySQL, PostgreSQL and ODBC. The latter is a standard API for using database management systems, which can be used to communicate with a wide variety of DBMS.

Configuration: interface type

Configures type of DBMS interface. Allowed values for type are:

mysql

Interface with a MySQL server (http://www.mysql.org).

odbc

Use ODBC interface. See http://www.unixodbc.org, for a detailed description of ODBC configuration.

postgres

Interface with a PostgreSQL server (http://www.postgres.org).

The database and database access credentials are configured using the following statements:

Configuration: host arg

The host running the SQL server. The value can be either a host name or an IP address in dotted-quad notation, in which case an INET connection is used, or a full pathname to a file, in which case a connection to UNIX socket is used.

Configuration: port arg

TCP port the server is listening on (for INET connections). This parameter is optional. Its default value depends on the type of database being used.

Configuration: db arg;

Name of the database.

Configuration: user arg

SQL user name.

Configuration: passwd arg;

Password to access the database.

2.2.18 LDAP Statement

This node is to be written.

Syntax

 
ldap {
  # Enable LDAP lookups.
  enable bool;
  # Set URL of the LDAP server.
  url url;
  # Base DN for LDAP lookups.
  base string;
  # DN for accessing LDAP database.
  binddn string;
  # Password for use with binddn.
  passwd string;
  # Use TLS encryption.
  tls bool;
  # Set LDAP debugging level.
  debug number;
  # Set a field-map for parsing LDAP replies.
  field-map map;
  # LDAP filter to use for getpwnam requests.
  getpwnam string;
  # LDAP filter to use for getpwuid requests.
  getpwuid filter;
}

2.2.19 TLS Statement

This node is to be written.

Syntax

 
tls {
  # Enable TLS support.
  enable bool;
  # Specify SSL certificate file.
  ssl-cert bool;
  # Specify SSL certificate key file.
  ssl-key file;
  # Specify trusted CAs file.
  ssl-cafile file;
}

2.2.20 GSASL Statement

This node is to be written.

Syntax

 
gsasl {
  # Name of GSASL password file.
  cram-passwd file;
  # SASL service name.
  service string;
  # SASL realm name.
  realm string;
  # SASL host name.
  hostname string;
  # Anonymous user name.
  anonymous-user string;
}

2.3 frm and from — List Headers from a Mailbox

GNU mailutils provides two commands for listing messages in a mailbox. These are from and frm.

The behavior of both programs is affected by the following configuration file statements:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.

frm

The frm utility outputs a header information of the selected messages in a mailbox. By default, frm reads user's system mailbox and outputs the contents of From and Subject headers for each message. If a folder is specified in the command line, the program reads that folder rather than the default mailbox.

The following command line options alter the behavior of the program:

-d
--debug

Enable debugging output.

-f string
--field string

Display the header named by string instead of From Subject pair.

-l
--to

Include the contents of To header to the output. The output field order is then: To From Subject.

-n
--number

Prefix each line with corresponding message number.

-Q
--Quiet

Be very quiet. Nothing is output except error messages. This is useful in shell scripts where only the return status of the program is important.

-q
--query

Print a message only if there are unread messages in the mailbox.

-S
--summary

Print a summary line.

-s attr
--status attr

Only display headers from messages with the given status. Attr may be one of the following: ‘new’, ‘read’, ‘unread’. It is sufficient to specify only first letter of an attr. Multiple ‘-s’ options are allowed.

-t
--align

Tidy mode. In this mode frm tries to preserve the alignment of the output fields. It also enables the use of BIDI algorithm for displaying subject lines that contain text in right-to-left orientation (such as Arabic or Hebrew).

from

The from utility displays sender and subject of each message in a mailbox. By default, it reads the user's system mailbox. If the program is given a single argument, it is interpreted as a name of the user whose mailbox is to be read. Obviously, permissions are required to access that user's mailbox, so such invocations may be used only by superuser.

The option ‘-f’ (‘--file’) instructs from to read the given mailbox.

The full list of options, supported by from follows:

-c
--count

Prints only a count of messages in the mailbox and exit.

-d
--debug

Prints additional debugging output.

-s string
--sender=string

Prints only mail whose ‘From:’ headers contain the supplied string.

-f url
--file=url

Examine mailbox from the given url.

2.4 mail — Send and Receive Mail

Mail is an enhanced version of standard /bin/mail program. As well as its predecessor, it can be used either in sending mode or in reading mode. Mail enters sending mode when one or more email addresses were specified in this command line. In this mode the program waits until user finishes composing the message, then attempts to send it to the specified addresses and exits. See Composing Mail, for a detailed description of this behavior.

If the command line contained no email addresses, mail switches to reading mode. In this mode it allows to read and manipulate the contents of the user system mailbox. The ‘--file’ (‘-f’) command line option allows to specify another mailbox name. For more detail, see Reading Mail.

In contrast to other GNU Mailutils programs, mail does not use the Mailutils configuration file. Instead, it uses the traditional ‘mailrc’-style configuration. See section Personal and System-wide Configuration Files, for a detailed description of its format.

2.4.1 Invoking mail

General usage of mail program is:

 
      mail [option...] [address...]

If [address...] part is present, mail switches to mail sending mode, otherwise it operates in mail reading mode.

The program uses following option groups: .

Mail understands following command line options:

-e
--exist

Return true if the mailbox contains some messages. Return false otherwise. This is useful for writing shell scripts.

-E command
--exec=command

Execute command before opening the mailbox. Any number of ‘--exec’ options can be given. The commands will be executed after sourcing configuration files (see section Personal and System-wide Configuration Files), but before opening the mailbox.

-f
--file

Operate on the mailbox given by the first non-optional command line argument. If there is no such argument, read messages from the user's ‘mbox’ file. See section Reading Mail, for more details about using this option.

-F
--byname

Record outgoing messages in a file named after the first recipient. The name is the login-name portion of the address found first on the ‘To:’ line in the mail header. This option sets the ‘byname’ variable, which see (see byname).

-H
--headers

Print header summary to stdout and exit.

-i
--ignore

Ignore interrupts.

-m path
--mail-spool=path

Set path to the mailspool directory

-n
--norc

Do not read the system-wide mailrc file. See section Personal and System-wide Configuration Files.

-N
--nosum

Do not display initial header summary.

-p
--print
-r
--read

Print all mail to standard output. It is equivalent to issuing following commands after starting ‘mail -N’:

 
print *
quit
-q
--quit

Cause interrupts to terminate program.

-s subj
--subject=subj

Send a message with a Subject of subj. Valid only in sending mode.

-t
--to

Switch to sending mode.

-u user
--user=user

Operate on user's mailbox. This is equivalent to:

 
mail -f/spool_path/user

with spool_path being the full path to your mailspool directory
(‘/var/spool/mail’ or ‘/var/mail’ on most systems).

-?
--help

Display a help message.

--usage

Display a short usage summary.

-V
--version

Print program version and exit.

2.4.2 How to Specify Message Sets

Many mail commands such as print and delete can be given a message list to operate upon. Wherever the message list is omitted, the command operates on the current message.

The message list in its simplest form is one of:

.

Selects current message. It is equivalent to empty message list.

*

Selects all messages in the mailbox.

^

Selects first non-deleted message.

$

Selects last non-deleted message.

In its complex form, the message list is a comma or whitespace-separated list of message specifiers. A message specifier is one of

Message Number

This specifier addresses the message with the given ordinal number in the mailbox.

Message range

Message range is specified as two message numbers separated by a dash. It selects all messages with the number lying within that range.

Attribute specifier

An Attribute specifier is a colon followed by a single letter. The Attribute specifier addresses all messages in the mailbox that have the given attribute. These are the valid attribute specifiers:

:d

Selects all deleted messages.

:n

Selects all recent messages, i.e. the messages that have not been neither read not seen so far.

:o

Selects all messages that have been seen.

:r

Selects all messages that have been read.

:u

Selects all messages that have not been read.

:t

Selects all tagged messages.

:T

Selects all untagged messages.

Header match

The header match is a string in the form:

 
[header:]/string/

It selects all messages that contain header field header matching given regexp. If the variable regexp is set, the string is assumed to be a POSIX regexp. Otherwise, a header is considered to match string if the latter constitutes a substring of the former (comparison is case-insensitive).

If header: part is omitted, it is assumed to be ‘Subject:’.

Message body match

The message body match is a string in the form:

 
:/string/

It selects all messages whose body matches the string. The matching rules are the same as described under “Header match”.

A message specifier can be followed by message part specifier, enclosed in a pair of brackets. A message part specifier controls which part of a message should be operated upon. It is meaningful only for multipart messages. A message part specifier is a comma or whitespace - separated list of part numbers or ranges. Each part number can in turn be message part specifier, thus allowing for operating upon multiply-encoded messages.

The following are the examples of valid message lists:

2.4.3 Composing Mail

You can compose the message by simply typing the contents of it, line by line. But usually this is not enough, you would need to edit your text, to quote some messages, etc. Mail provides these capabilities through compose escapes. The compose escapes are single-character commands, preceded by special escape character, which defaults to ‘~’. The combination escape character + command is recognized as a compose escape only if it occurs at the beginning of a line. If the escape character must appear at the beginning of a line, enter it twice. The actual escape character may be changed by setting the value of escape mail variable (see section How to Alter the Behavior of mail).

Quitting Compose Mode

There are several commands allowing you to quit the compose mode.

Typing the end-of-file character (‘C-D’) on a line alone finishes compose mode and sends the message to its destination. The ‘C-D’ character looses its special meaning if ignoreeof mail variable is set.

If mail variable dot is set, typing dot (‘.’) on a line alone achieves the same effect as ‘C-D’ above.

Finally, using ‘~.’ escape always quits compose mode and sends out the composed message.

To abort composing of a message without sending it, type interrupt character (by default, ‘C-C’) twice. This behavior is disabled when mail variable ignore is set. In this case, you can use ‘~x’ escape to achieve the same effect.

Getting Help on Compose Escapes: ~?

The ‘~?’ escape prints on screen a brief summary of the available compose escapes. Please note, that ‘~h’ escape prompts for changing the header values, and does not give help.

Editing the Message: ~e and ~v

If you are not satisfied with the message as it is, you can edit it using a text editor specified either by EDITOR or by VISUAL environment variables. The ‘~e’ uses the former, and ‘~v’ uses the latter.

By default both escapes allow you to edit only the body of the message. However, if the editheaders variable is set, mail will load into the editor the complete text of the message with headers included, thus allowing you to change the headers as well.

Modifying the Headers: ~h, ~t, ~c, ~b, ~s

To add new addresses to the list of message recipients, use ‘~t’ command, e.g.:

 
~t name1@domain.net name2

To add addresses to Cc or Bcc, use ‘~c’ or ‘~b’ escapes respectively.

To change the Subject header, use ‘~s’ escape, e.g.:

 
~s "Re: your message"

Finally, to edit all headers, type ‘~h’ escape. This will present you with the values of To, Cc, Bcc, and Subject headers allowing to edit them with normal text editing commands.

Enclosing Another Message: ~m and ~M

If you are sending mail from within mail command mode, you can enclose the contents of any message sent to you by using ‘~m’ or ‘~M’ commands. Typing ‘~m’ alone will enclose the contents of the current message, typing ‘~m 12’ will enclose the contents of message #12 and so on.

The ‘~m’ uses retained and ignored lists when enclosing headers, the ‘~M’ encloses all header fields.

In both cases, the contents of indentprefix mail variable is prepended to each line enclosed.

Adding a File to the Message: ~r and ~d

To append the contents of file filename to the message, type

 
~r filename

or

 
~< filename

The ‘~d’ escape is a shorthand for

 
~r dead.letter

Printing And Saving the Message

The ‘~p’ escape types the contents of the message entered so far, including headers, on your terminal. You can save the message to an arbitrary file using ‘~w’ escape. It takes the filename as its argument.

Signing the Message: ~a and ~A

To save you the effort of typing your signature at the end of each message, you can use ‘~a’ or ‘~A’ escapes. If your signature occupies one line only, save it to the variable sign and use ‘~a’ escape to insert it. Otherwise, if it is longer than one line, save it to a file, store the name of this file in the variable Sign, and use ‘~A’ escape to insert it into the message.

Printing Another Message: ~f and ~F

Sometimes it is necessary to view the contents of another message, while composing. These two escapes allow it. Both take the message list as their argument. If they are used without argument, the contents of the current message is printed. The difference between ‘~f’ and ‘~F’ is that the former uses ignored and retained lists to select headers to be displayed, whereas the latter prints all headers.

Inserting Value of a Mail Variable: ~i

The ‘~i’ escape enters the value of the named mail variable into the body of the message being composed.

Executing Other Mail Commands: ~: and ~-

You can execute a mail command from within compose mode using ‘~:’ or ‘~-’ escapes. For example, typing

 
~: from :t

will display the from lines of all tagged messages. Note, that executing mail-sending commands from within the compose mode is not allowed. An attempt to execute such a command will result in diagnostic message “Command not allowed in an escape sequence” being displayed. Also, when starting compose mode immediately from the shell (e.g. running ‘mail address@domain’), most mail commands are meaningless, since there is no mailbox to operate upon. In this case, the only commands that can reasonably be used are: alias, unalias, alternate, set, and unset.

Executing Shell Commands: ~! and ~|

The ‘~!’ escape executes specified command and returns you to mail compose mode without altering your message. When used without arguments, it starts your login shell. The ‘~|’ escape pipes the message composed so far through the given shell command and replaces the message with the output the command produced. If the command produced no output, mail assumes that something went wrong and retains the old contents of your message.

2.4.4 Reading Mail

To read messages from a given mailbox, use one of the following ways of invoking mail:

mail

To read messages from your system mailbox.

mail -f
mail --file

To read messages from your mailbox (‘$HOME/mbox’). If the ‘--user’ option (see below) is also given, read messages from that user's ‘mbox’.

mail -f path_to_mailbox
mail --file path_to_mailbox

To read messages from the specified mailbox.

mail -u user
mail --user=user

To read messages from the system mailbox belonging to user.

Please note, that usual mailbox permissions won't allow you to use the last variant of invocation, unless you are a super-user. Similarly, the last but one variant is also greatly affected by the permissions the target mailbox has.

Notice that path_to_mailbox is not an argument to ‘--file’ (‘-f’) option, but rather the first non-optional argument on the command line. Therefore, the following three invocations are equivalent:

 
$ mail -fin mymbox
$ mail -f mymbox -in
$ mail --file -in mymbox
$ mail --file -i mymbox -n

Additionally, for conformance to the GNU standards, the following form is also accepted:

 
$ mail --file=mymbox -i -n

Unless you have started mail with ‘--norc’ command line option, it will read the contents of the system-wide configuration file. Then it reads the contents of user configuration file, if any. For detailed description of these files, see Personal and System-wide Configuration Files. After this initial setup, mail displays the first page of header lines and enters interactive mode. In interactive mode, mail displays its prompt (‘?’, if not set otherwise) and executes the commands the user enters.

Quitting the Program

Following commands quit the program:

quit

Terminates the session. If mail was operating upon user's system mailbox, then all undeleted and unsaved messages that have been read and are not marked with hold flag are saved to the user's mbox file (‘$HOME/mbox’). The messages, marked with delete are removed. The program exits to the Shell, unless saving the mailbox fails, in which case user can escape with the exit command.

exit
ex
xit

Program exits to the Shell without modifying the mailbox it operates upon.

Typing EOF (‘C-D’) alone is equivalent to ‘quit’.

Obtaining Online Help

Following commands can be used during the session to request online help:

help [command]
hel [command]
? [command]

Display detailed command synopsis. If no command is given, help for all available commands is displayed.

list
*

Print a list of available commands.

version
ve

Display program version.

warranty
wa

Display program warranty statement.

Moving Within a Mailbox

^

Move to the first undeleted message.

$

Move to the last undeleted message.

next
n

Move to the next message.

previous
prev

Move to the previous message.

Changing Mailbox/Directory

cd [dir]
chdir [dir]
ch [dir]

Change to the specified directory. If dir is omitted, $HOME is assumed.

file [mailbox]
fi [mailbox]
folder [mailbox]
fold [mailbox]

Read in the contents of the specified mailbox. The current mailbox is updated as if quit command has been issued. If mailbox is omitted, the command prints the current mailbox name followed by the summary information regarding it, e.g.:

 
& fold
"/var/spool/mail/gray": 23 messages 22 unread

Controlling Header Display

To control which headers in the message should be displayed, mail keeps two lists: a retained header list and an ignored header list. If retained header list is not empty, only the header fields listed in it are displayed when printing the message. Otherwise, if ignored header list is not empty, only the headers not listed in this list are displayed. The uppercase variants of message-displaying commands can be used to print all the headers.

The following commands modify and display the contents of both lists.

discard [header-field-list]
di [header-field-list]
ignore [header-field-list]
ig [header-field-list]

Add header-field-list to the ignored list. When used without arguments, this command prints the contents of ignored list.

retain [header-field-list]
ret [header-field-list]

Add header-field-list to the retained list. When used without arguments, this command prints the contents of retained list.

Displaying Information

=

Displays the current message number.

headers [msglist]
h [msglist]

Lists the current pageful of headers.

from [msglist]
f [msglist]

Lists the contents of ‘From’ headers for a given set of messages.

z [arg]

Presents message headers in pagefuls as described for headers command. When arg is ‘.’, it is generally equivalent to headers. When arg is omitted or is ‘+’, the next pageful of headers is displayed. If arg is ‘-’, the previous pageful of headers is displayed. The latter two forms of z command may also take a numerical argument meaning the number of pages to skip before displaying the headers. For example:

 
& z +2

will skip two pages of messages before displaying the header summary.

size [msglist]
si [msglist]

Lists the message number and message size in bytes for each message in msglist.

folders

Displays the value of folder variable.

summary
su

Displays current mailbox summary. E.g.:

 
& summary
"/var/spool/mail/gray": 23 messages 22 unread

Displaying Messages

print [msglist]
p [msglist]
type [msglist]
t [msglist]

Prints out the messages from msglist. The variable crt determines the minimum number of lines the body of the message must contain in order to be piped through pager command specified by environment variable PAGER. If crt is set to a numeric value, this value is taken as the minimum number of lines. Otherwise, if crt is set without a value then the height of the terminal screen is used to compute the threshold. The number of lines on screen is controlled by screen variable.

Print [msglist]
P [msglist]
Type [msglist]
T [msglist]

Like print but also prints out ignored header fields.

decode [msglist]
dec [msglist]

Print a multipart message. The decode command decodes and prints out specified message parts. E.g.

 
& decode 15[2]
+---------------------------------------
| Message=15[2]
| Type=message/delivery-status
| encoding=7bit
+---------------------------------------
Content-Type: message/delivery-status
...
top [msglist]
to [msglist]

Prints the top few lines of each message in msglist. The number of lines printed is controlled by the variable toplines and defaults to five.

pipe [msglist] [shell-command]
| [msglist] [shell-command]

Pipe the contents of specified messages through shell-command. If shell-command is empty but the string variable cmd is set, the value of this variable is used as a command name.

struct [msglist]

Prints the MIME structure of each message from msglist. Empty msglist means current message.

Example:

 
& struct 2
2      multipart/mixed            14k
2[1]   text/plain                 296
2[2]   application/octet-stream    5k
2[3]   text/x-diff                31k

Marking Messages

tag [msglist]
ta [msglist]

Tag messages. The tagged messages can be referred to in message list using ‘:t’ notation.

untag [msglist]
unt [msglist]

Clear tags from specified messages. To untag all messages tagged so far type

 
& untag :t
hold [msglist]
ho [msglist]
preserve [msglist]
pre [msglist]

Marks each message to be held in user's system mailbox. This command does not override the effect of delete command.

Disposing of Messages

delete [msglist]
d [msglist]

Mark messages as deleted. Upon exiting with quit command these messages will be deleted from the mailbox. Until the end of current session the deleted messages can be referred to in message lists using :d notation.

undelete [msglist]
u [msglist]

Clear delete mark from the specified messages.

dp [msglist]
dt [msglist]

Deletes the current message and prints the next message. If msglist is specified, deletes all messages from the list and prints the message, immediately following last deleted one.

Saving Messages

save [[msglist] file]
s [[msglist] file]

Takes a message list and a file name and appends each message in turn to the end of the file. The name of file and number of characters appended to it is echoed on the terminal. Each saved message is marked for deletion as if with delete command, unless the variable keepsave is set.

Save [msglist]
S [msglist]

Like save, but the file to append messages to is named after the sender of the first message in msglist. For example:

 
& from 14 15
 U  14 smith@noldor.org Fri Jun 30 18:11  14/358   The Save c
 U  15 gray@noldor.org  Fri Jun 30 18:30  8/245    Re: The Sa
& Save 14 15
"smith" 22/603

i.e., 22 lines (603 characters) have been appended to the file “smith”. If the file does not exist, it is created.

write [[msglist] file]
w [[msglist] file]

Similar to save, except that only message body (without the header) is saved.

Write [msglist]
W [msglist]

Similar to Save, except that only message body (without the header) is saved.

mbox [msglist]
mb [msglist]
touch [msglist]
tou [msglist]

Mark list of messages to be saved in the user's mailbox (‘$HOME/mbox’) upon exiting via quit command. This is the default action for all read messages, unless you have variable hold set.

copy [[msglist] file]
c [[msglist] file]

Similar to save, except that saved messages are not marked for deletion.

Copy [msglist]
C [msglist]

Similar to Save, except that saved messages are not marked for deletion.

Editing Messages

These command allow to edit messages in a mailbox. Please note, that modified messages currently do not replace original ones. i.e. you have to save them explicitly using your editor's save command if you do not want the effects of your editing to be lost.

edit [msglist]
e [msglist]

Edits each message in msglist with the editor, specified in EDITOR environment variable.

visual [msglist]
v [msglist]

Edits each message in msglist with the editor, specified in VISUAL environment variable.

Aliasing

alias [alias [address...]]
a [alias [address...]]
group [alias [address...]]
g [alias [address...]]

With no arguments, prints out all currently-defined aliases. With one argument, prints out that alias. With more than one argument, creates a new alias or changes an old one.

unalias [alias...]
una [alias...]

Takes a list of names defined by alias commands and discards the remembered groups of users. The alias names no longer have any significance.

alternates name...
alt name...

The alternates command is useful if you have accounts on several machines. It can be used to inform mail that the listed addresses are really you. When you reply to messages, mail will not send a copy of the message to any of the addresses listed on the alternates list. If the alternates command is given with no argument, the current set of alternate names is displayed.

Replying

mail [address...]
m [address...]

Switches to compose mode. After composing the message, sends messages to the specified addresses.

reply [msglist]
respond [msglist]
r [msglist]

For each message in msglist, switches to compose mode and sends the composed message to the sender and all recipients of the message.

Reply [msglist]
Respond [msglist]
R [msglist]

Like reply, except that the composed message is sent only to originators of the specified messages.

Notice, that setting mail variable flipr (see section How to Alter the Behavior of mail) swaps the meanings of the two above commands, so that reply sends the message to the sender and all recipients of the message, whereas Reply sends it to originators only.

followup [msglist]
fo [msglist]

Switches to compose mode. After composing, sends the message to the originators and recipients of all messages in msglist.

Followup [msglist]
F [msglist]

Similar to followup, but reply message is sent only to originators of messages in msglist.

To determine the sender of the message mail uses the list of sender fields (see Controlling Sender Fields). The first field from this list is looked up in message headers. If it is found and contains a valid email address, this address is used as the sender address. If not, the second field is searched and so on. This process continues until a field is found in the headers, or the sender field list is exhausted, whichever happens first.

If the previous step did not determine the sender address, the address from SMTP envelope is used.

Let's illustrate this. Suppose your mailbox contains the following:

 
 U  1 block@helsingor.org  Fri Jun 30 18:30  8/245    Re: The Sa
& Print 1
From: Antonius Block <block@helsingor.org>
To: Smeden Plog <plog@helsingor.org>
Date: Tue, 27 Apr 2004 13:23:41 +0300
Reply-To: <root@helsingor.org>
Subject: News

Hi

Now, you issue the following commands:

 
& sender mail-followup-to reply-to from
& reply
To: <root@helsingor.org>
Subject: Re: News

As you see, the value of Reply-To field was taken as the sender address.

Now, let's try the following command sequence:

 
# Clear the sender list
& nosender
# Set new sender list
& sender From

Now, the From address will be taken:

 
& reply
To: Antonius Block <block@helsingor.org>
Subject: Re: News

Controlling Sender Fields

Commands sender and nosender are used to manipulate the contents of the sender field list.

If the command sender is used without arguments, it displays the contents of the sender field list. If arguments are given, each argument is appended to the sender field list. For example:

 
& sender
Sender address is obtained from the envelope
& sender mail-followup-to reply-to
& sender
mail-followup-to
reply-to
& sender from
& sender
mail-followup-to
reply-to
from

Command nosender is used to remove items from the sender field list:

 
& sender
mail-followup-to
reply-to
from
& nosender reply-to
& sender
mail-followup-to
from

When used without arguments, this command clears the list:

 
& nosender
Sender address is obtained from the envelope

Incorporating New Mail

The incorporate (inc) command incorporates newly arrived messages to the displayed list of messages. This is done automatically before returning to mail command prompt if the variable autoinc is set.

Shell Escapes

To run arbitrary shell command from mail command prompt, use shell (sh) command. If no arguments are specified, the command starts the user login shell. Otherwise, it uses its first argument as a file name to execute and all subsequent arguments are passed as positional parameters to this command. The shell command can also be spelled as !.

2.4.5 Scripting

Comments

The ‘#’ character introduces an end-of-line comment. All characters until and including the end of line are ignored.

Displaying Arbitrary Text

The ‘echo’ (‘ec’) command prints its arguments to stdout.

Sourcing External Command Files

The command ‘source filename’ reads commands from the named file. Its minimal abbreviation is ‘so’.

Setting and Unsetting the Variables

The mail variables are set using ‘set’ (‘se’) command. The command takes a list of assignments. The syntax of an assignment is

name=string

Assign a string value to the variable. If string contains whitespace characters it must be enclosed in a pair of double-quote characters (‘"’)

name=number

Assign a numeric value to the variable.

name

Assign boolean True value.

noname

Assign boolean False value.

Example:

 
& set askcc nocrt indentprefix="> "

This statement sets askcc to True, crt to False, and indentprefix to “> ”.

To unset mail variables use ‘unset’(‘uns’) command. The command takes a list of variable names to unset.

Example: To undo the effect of the previous example, do:

 
& unset askcc crt indentprefix

When used without arguments, both set or unset list all currently defined variables. The form of this listing is controlled by variable-pretty-print (varpp) variable. If it is set, a description precedes each variable, e.g.:

 
# prompt user for subject before composing the message
ask
# prompt user for cc before composing the message
askcc
# output character set for decoded header fields
charset="auto"
# number of columns on terminal screen
columns=80

If variable-pretty-print is not set, only the settings are shown, e.g.:

 
ask
askcc
charset="auto"
columns=80

A special command is provided to list all internal mail variables:

 
variable [names...]

If used without arguments, it prints all known internal variables. If arguments are given, it displays only those internal variables that are listed in command line. For each variable, this command prints its name, data type, current value and a short description. For example:

 
& variable ask datefield
ask, asksub
Type: boolean
Current value: yes
prompt user for subject before composing the message

datefield
Type: boolean
Current value: [not set]
get date from the `Date:' header, instead of the envelope

Setting and Unsetting Shell Environment Variables

Shell environment may be modified using ‘setenv’ (‘sete’) command. The command takes a list of assignments. The syntax of an assignment is:

name=value

If variable name does not already exist in the environment, then it is added to the environment with the value value. If name does exist, then its value in the environment is changed to value.

name

Delete the variable name from the environment (“unset” it).

Conditional Statements

The conditional statement allows to execute a set of mail commands depending on the mode the mail program is in. The conditional statement is:

 
if cond
...
else
...
endif

where ‘...’ represents the set of commands to be executed in each branch of the statement. cond can be one of the following:

s

True if mail is operating in mail sending mode.

r

True if mail is operating in mail reading mode.

t

True if stdout is a terminal device (as opposed to a regular file).

The conditional statements can be nested to arbitrary depth. The minimal abbreviations for ‘if’, ‘else’ and ‘endif’ commands are ‘i’, ‘el’ and ‘en’.

Example:

 
if t
set crt prompt="& "
else
unset prompt
endif
if s
alt gray@farlep.net gray@mirddin.farlep.net
set

2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail

Following variables control the behavior of GNU mail:

append

Type: Boolean, Read-Only
Default: True

Messages saved in mbox are appended to the end rather than prepended. This is the default and cannot be changed. This variable exists only for compatibility with other mailx implementations.

appenddeadletter

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

If this variable is True, the contents of canceled letter is appended to the user's ‘dead.letter’ file. Otherwise it overwrites its contents.

askbcc

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set to True the user will be prompted to enter Bcc field before composing the message.

askcc

Type: Boolean.
Default: True.

When set to True the user will be prompted to enter Cc field before composing the message.

asksub

Type: Boolean.
Default: True in interactive mode, False otherwise.

When set to True the user will be prompted to enter Subject field before composing the message.

autoinc

Type: Boolean.
Default: True.

Automatically incorporate newly arrived messages.

autoprint

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

Causes the delete command to behave like dp - thus, after deleting a message, the next one will be typed automatically.

bang

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set, every occurrence of ! in arguments to ! command is replaced with the last executed command.

byname

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

Record outgoing messages in a file named after the first recipient. The name is the login-name portion of the address found first on the ‘To:’ line in the mail header. This variable overrides the ‘record’ variable.

It is set by the ‘--byname’ (‘-F’) command line option.

datefield

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

By default the date in a header summary is taken from the SMTP envelope of the message. Setting this variable tells mail to use the date from Date: header field, converted to local time. Notice, that for messages lacking this field mail will fall back to using SMTP envelope.

See fromfield.

charset

Type: string
Default: ‘auto

The value of this variable controls the output character set for the header fields encoding using RFC 2047. If the variable is unset, no decoding is performed and the fields are printed as they are. If the variable is set to ‘auto’, mail tries to deduce the name of the character set from the value of LC_ALL environment variable. Otherwise, its value is taken as the name of the charset.

cmd

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

Contains default shell command for pipe.

columns

Type: Numeric.
Default: Detected at startup by querying the terminal device. If this fails, the value of environment variable COLUMNS is used.

This variable contains the number of columns on terminal screen.

crt

Type: Boolean or Numeric
Default: True in interactive mode, False otherwise.

The variable crt determines the minimum number of lines the body of the message must contain in order to be piped through pager command specified by environment variable PAGER. If crt is set to a numeric value, this value is taken as the threshold. Otherwise, if crt is set without a value, then the height of the terminal screen is used to compute the threshold. The number of lines on screen is controlled by screen variable.

debug

Type: String to boolean
Default: Not set

Sets mailutils debug level. If set to string, the value must be a valid Mailutils debugging specification. See section Debug Statement, for a description.

If unset (i.e. set nodebug), clears and disables all debugging information. If set to ‘true’ (i.e. set debug), sets maximum debugging (‘<trace7’) on mailbox and its underlying objects.

decode-fallback

Type: String.
Default: ‘none’.

This variable controls the way to represent characters that cannot be rendered using current character set. It can have three values:

none

Such characters are not printed at all. The conversion process stops at the first character that cannot be rendered.

copy-pass

The characters are displayed ‘as is’. Notice, that depending on your setup, this may screw-up your terminal settings.

copy-octal

Unprintable characters are represented by their octal codes. Printable ones are printed ‘as is’.

debug

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

This variable is not used. It exists for compatibility with other mailx implementations and for future use.

dot

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

If True, causes mail to interpret a period alone on a line as the terminator of a message you are sending.

emptystart

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

If the mailbox is empty, mail normally prints ‘No mail for user’ and exits immediately. If this option is set, mail will start no matter is the mailbox empty or not.

editheaders

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set, mail will include message headers in the text to be the ~e and ~v escapes, thus allowing you to customize the headers.

escape

Type: String.
Default: ~

If defined, the first character of this option gives the character to denoting escapes.

flipr

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

If set, the variable flipr swaps the meanings of reply and Reply commands (see Replying).

folder

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

The name of the directory to use for storing folders of messages. If unset, $HOME is assumed.

fromfield

Type: Boolean.
Default: True.

By default the sender address is taken from the ‘From’ header. Unsetting this variable tells mail to obtain it from the SMTP envelope, instead.

See datefield.

header

Type: Boolean.
Default: True, unless started with ‘--nosum’ (‘-N’) option.

Whether to run headers command automatically after entering interactive mode.

headline

Type: String
Default: ‘%>%a%4m %18f %16d %3l/%-5o %s

A format string to use for the header summary. The ‘%’ character introduces a format specifier. Valid format specifiers are:

Letter Meaning
%a Message attributes.
%d The date when the message was received.
%f The address of the message sender.
%l The number of lines of the message.
%m Message number.
%o The number of octets (bytes) in the message.
%s Message subject (if any).
%S Message subject (if any) in double quotes.
%> A ‘>’ for the current message, otherwise a space.
%< A ‘<’ for the current message, otherwise a space.
%% A `%' character.

Some additional symbols are allowed between ‘%’ and the specifier letter. The ‘-’ character immediately following ‘%’ indicates that this field should be left aligned. Similarly, the ‘+’ character indicates right alignment. Default alignment depends on the type of the specifier: the specifiers that produce numeric values (‘%l’, ‘%m’, and ‘%o’) are aligned to the right, whereas the ones producing string values are aligned to the left.

A number following ‘%’ or the alignment flag, indicates the field width. Consider, for example, the following specifiers:

%m

Print current message number. Take as much screen columns as necessary to output it.

%4m
%+4m

Print current message number. Occupy 4 screen columns, truncate the output if it does not fit that width. Align the output to the right.

%-4m

Same as above, but align to the left.

hold

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set to True, the read or saved messages will be stored in user's mailbox (‘$HOME/mbox’). Otherwise, they will be held in system mailbox also. This option is in effect only when operating upon user's system mailbox.

ignore

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set to True, mail will ignore keyboard interrupts when composing messages. Otherwise an interrupt will be taken as a signal to abort composing.

ignoreeof

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

Controls whether typing EOF character terminates the letter being composed.

indentprefix

Type: String.
Default: "\t" (a tab character).

String used by the ~m tilde escape for indenting quoted messages.

inplacealiases

Type: Boolean
Default: False

If set, mail will expand aliases in the address header field before entering send mode (see section Composing Mail). By default, the address header fields are left intact while composing, the alias expansion takes place immediately before sending message.

keep

Type: Boolean, Read-Only
Default: True

Truncate the user's system mailbox when it is empty, instead of removing it. This is the default and cannot be changed. This variable exists only for compatibility with other mailx implementations.

keepsave

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

Controls whether saved messages should be kept in system mailbox too. This variable is in effect only when operating upon a user's system mailbox.

mailx

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set, enables mailx compatibility mode. This mode has the following effects:

metamail

Type: Boolean or String.
Default: True.

This variable controls operation of decode command. If it is unset, decode will not attempt any interpretation of the content of message parts. Otherwise, if metamail is set to true, decode will use internal metamail support to interpret message parts. Finally, if metamail is assigned a string, this string is treated as command line of the external metamail command which will be used to display parts of a multipart message. For example:

 
# Disable MIME interpretation:
set nometamail
# Enable built-in MIME support:
set metamail
# Use external program to display MIME parts:
set metamail="metamail -m mail -p"
mimenoask

Type: String
Default: Empty

By default mail asks for confirmation before running interpreter to view a part of the multi-part message. If this variable is set, its value is treated as a comma-separated list of MIME types for which no confirmation is needed. Elements of this list may include shell-style globbing patterns, e.g. setting

 
set mimenoask=text/*,image/jpeg

will disable prompting before displaying any textual files, no matter what their subtype is, and before displaying files with type ‘image/jpeg’.

metoo

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

Usually, when an alias is expanded that contains the sender, the sender is removed from the expansion. Setting this option causes the sender to be included in the group.

mode

Type: String, Read-Only
Default: The name of current operation mode.

This variable keeps the name of the current operation mode. Its possible values are:

headers

The program is started with the ‘--headers’ (‘-H’) command line option (see section Invoking mail).

exist

The program is started with the ‘--exist’ (‘-e’) command line option (see section Invoking mail).

print

The program is started with the ‘--print’ (‘-p’) command line option (see section Invoking mail).

read

The progran operates in read mode. This is the default.

send

The program operates in send mode. This means it was given one or more recipient addresses in the command line.

nullbody

Type: Boolean
Default: True

Controls whether mail accepts messages with an empty body. The default value, true, means such messages are sent, and a warning (traditionally saying ‘Null message body; hope that's ok’) is displayed. The text of the warning can be set using nullbodymsg variable (see below).

If nullbody is unset, mail will silently ignore such messages. This can be useful in ‘crontab’ files, to avoid sending mails when nothing important happens. For example, the ‘crontab’ entry below will send mail only if the utility some-prog outputs something on its standard output or error:

 
*/5 * * * * some-prog 2>&1 | \
   /bin/mail -E'set nonullbody' -s 'Periodic synchronization'
showenvelope

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

If this variable is set, the print command will include the STMP envelope in its output.

nullbodymsg

Type: String
Default: Null message body; hope that's ok

Keeps the text of the warning, displayed by mail before sending an empty message. When available, the translation of this text, in accordance with the current locale, is displayed.

Unsetting this variable disables the warning.

onehop

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

This variable is not used. It exists for compatibility with other mailx implementations and for future use.

outfolder

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

Contains the directory in which files created by save, write, etc. commands will be stored. When unset, current directory is assumed.

page

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

If set to True, the pipe command will emit a linefeed character after printing each message.

prompt

Type: String.
Default: "? "

Contains the command prompt sequence.

quiet

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

This variable is not used. It exists for compatibility with other mailx implementations and for future use.

quit

Type: Boolean.
Default: False, unless started with ‘--quit’ (‘-q’) option.

When set, causes keyboard interrupts to terminate the program.

rc

Type: Boolean.
Default: True, unless started with ‘--norc’ (‘-N’) option.

When this variable is set, mail will read the system-wide configuration file upon startup. See Personal and System-wide Configuration Files.

readonly

Type: Boolean
Default: False

When set, mailboxes are opened in readonly mode. In this mode, any mail commands that alter the contents of the mailbox are disabled. These commands include, but are not limited to: delete, save and mbox.

record

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

When set, any outgoing message will be saved to the named file.

recursivealiases

Type: Boolean
Default: True

When set, mail will expand aliases recursively.

regex

Type: Boolean.
Default: True.

Setting this to True enables use of regular expressions in ‘/.../’ message specifications.

replyprefix

Type: String
Default: ‘Re:

Sets the prefix that will be used when constructing the subject line of a reply message.

replyregex

Type: String
Default: ‘^re: *

Sets the regular expression used to recognize subjects of reply messages. If the Subject header of the message matches this expression, the value of replyprefix will not be prepended to it before replying. The expression should be a POSIX extended regular expression. The comparison is case-insensitive.

For example, to recognize usual English, Polish, Norwegian and German reply subject styles, use:

 
set replyregex="^(re|odp|aw|ang)(\\[[0-9]+\\])?:[[:blank:]]"

(Notice the quoting of backslash characters).

save

Type: Boolean.
Default: True.

When set, the aborted messages will be stored in the user's ‘dead.file’. See also appenddeadletter.

screen

Type: Numeric.
Default: Detected at startup by querying the terminal device. If this fails, the value of environment variable LINES is used.

This variable contains the number of lines on terminal screen.

sendmail

Type: String.
Default: sendmail:/usr/lib/sendmail

Contains URL of the mail transport agent.

sendwait

Type: Boolean
Default: Unset

This variable is not used. It exists for compatibility with other mailx implementations and for future use.

showto

Type: Boolean
Default: False

If the message was sent by the user, print its recipient address in the header summary.

Sign

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

Contains the filename holding users signature. The contents of this file is appended to the end of a message being composed by ~A escape.

sign

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

Contains the user's signature. The contents of this variable is appended to the end of a message being composed by ~a escape. Use Sign variable, if your signature occupies more than one line.

showto

Type: Boolean
Default: unset

If this variable is set, mail will show To: addresses instead of From: for all messages that come from the user that invoked the program.

subject

Type: String.
Default: Unset.

Contains default subject line. This will be used when asksub is off.

toplines

Type: Numeric.
Default: 5

Number of lines to be displayed by top and Top commands.

variable-strict
varstrict

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

Setting this variable enables strict control over variable settings. In this mode, mail refuses to set read-only variables. Also, if the user is trying to set an unknown variable, mail prints a warning.

See Setting and Unsetting the Variables.

variable-pretty-print
varpp

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

If this variable is set, the listing ouput by set contains short descriptions before each variable. See Setting and Unsetting the Variables.

verbose

Type: Boolean.
Default: False.

When set, the actual delivery of messages is displayed on the user's terminal.

xmailer

Type: Boolean.
Default: Set.

Controls whether the header ‘X-Mailer’ should be added to outgoing messages. The default value of this header is

 
X-Mailer: mail (GNU Mailutils 2.2)

2.4.7 Personal and System-wide Configuration Files

Upon startup, mail reads the contents of the two command files: the system-wide configuration file, and the user's configuration file. Each line read from these files is processed like a usual mail command.

When run with ‘--norc’ (‘-N’) option, mail does not read the contents of system-wide configuration file. The user's file, if it exists, is always processed.

The user's configuration file is located in the user's home directory and is named ‘.mailrc’. The location and name of the system-wide configuration file is determined when configuring the package via ‘--with-mail-rc’ option. It defaults to ‘sysconfdir/mail.rc’.

2.5 messages — Count the Number of Messages in a Mailbox

Messages prints on standard output the number of messages contained in each folder specified in command line. If no folders are specified, it operates upon user's system mailbox. For each folder, the following output line is produced:

 
Number of messages in folder: number

where folder represents the folder name, number represents the number of messages.

Following configuration file statements affect the behaviour of messages:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.

The program accepts following command line options:

-q
--quiet
-s
--silent

Be quiet. Display only number of messages per mailbox, without leading text.

-?
--help

Output help message and exit.

--usage

Output short usage summary and exit.

-V
--version

Output program version and exit.

2.6 movemail — Moves Mail from the User Maildrop to the Local File

The purpose of movemail, as its name implies, is to move mail from one location to another. For example, the following invocation:

 
movemail /var/mail/smith INBOX

moves messages from file ‘/var/mail/smith’ to file ‘INBOX’.

You will probably never have to run this program manually. It is intended as a replacement for movemail from GNU Emacs. The movemail program is run by Emacs Rmail module. See (emacs)Rmail section `Rmail' in Reading Mail with Rmail, for detailed description of Rmail interface.

Mailutils version of movemail is fully backward-compatible with its Emacs predecessor, so it should run flawlessly with older versions of Emacs. Emacs versions starting from 22.1 contain improved Rmail interface and are able to take advantage of all new features mailutils movemail provides.

2.6.1 Movemail Configuration

Following configuration file statements affect the behavior of movemail:

Movemail Config: preserve bool

If bool is ‘true’, do not remove messages from the source mailbox.

Movemail Config: reverse bool

If bool is ‘true’, reverse message sorting order.

Movemail Config: emacs bool

If bool is ‘true’, output information used by Emacs rmail interface.

Movemail Config: ignore-erros bool

Continue moving messages after errors. By default, mailfromd exits immediately if it cannot copy a message.

Movemail Config: program-id fmt

Set program identifier, i.e. a string which will prefix all diagnostic messages issued by the program. By default, program name is used.

The fmt is a format string that may contain references to the following macro variables ():

progname

The program name.

source

URL of the source mailbox.

source:user

User part of the source mailbox URL.

source:host

Host part of the source mailbox URL.

source:path

Path part of the source mailbox URL.

dest

URL of the destination mailbox

dest:user

User part of the destination mailbox URL.

dest:host

Host part of the destination mailbox URL.

dest:path

Path part of the destination mailbox URL.

Setting program-id may be necessary if several movemail instances are run simultaneously (e.g. invoked from a script) to discern between the instances. For example:

 
program-id "${progname}: ${source} => ${dest}"
Movemail Config: uidl bool

Avoid copying the message if a message with the same UIDL already exists in the destination mailbox.

Movemail Config: verbose level

Set verbosity level.

Movemail Config: mailbox-ownership method-list

Define list of methods for setting ownership of the destination mailbox. The method-list argument can contain the following elements:

copy-id

Copy owner UID and GID from the source mailbox. This method works only with local mailboxes, i.e.: ‘mbox’ (UNIX mailbox), ‘maildir’ and ‘mh’.

copy-name

Get owner name from the source mailbox URL and obtain UID and GID for this user using mailutils authorization methods.

set-id=uid[:gid]

Set supplied uid and gid. If gid is not supplied, it is read from the ‘/etc/passwd’ record for this UID.

set-name=user

Make destination mailbox owned by user.

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
pam See section PAM Statement.
sql See section SQL Statement.
virtdomain See section Virtdomain Statement.
radius See section Radius Statement.
ldap See section LDAP Statement.
auth See section Auth Statement.

2.6.2 Movemail Options

This subsection discusses movemail options from the point of view of an Emacs Rmail user.

To set various options to movemail from Rmail, use rmail-movemail-flags variable, or ‘Rmail Movemail Flags’ section from the menu.

Some POP servers return messages in reversed order. To fix the order, use ‘-p’ option or its synonym ‘--reverse’.

If the remote server supports TLS encryption, use ‘--tls’ to instruct movemail to initiate encrypted connection.

2.6.3 Setting Destination Mailbox Ownership

(The information in this node may be obsolete or otherwise inaccurate. This message will disappear, once this node revised.)

2.6.4 Movemail Usage Summary

 
movemail [option...] inbox destfile [remote-password]

The first argument, inbox, is the url (see section URL) of the source mailbox. The second argument, destfile, traditionally means destination file, i.e. the UNIX mailbox to copy messages to. However, mailutils movemail extends the meaning of this parameter. You may actually specify any valid URL as destfile parameter.(1). Finally, optional third argument is a traditional way of specifying user passwords for remote (POP or IMAP) mailboxes.

Following is the summary of available command line options:

--emacs

Output information used by Emacs rmail interface

--ignore-errors

Continue moving messages after an error occurs.

-p
--preserve
--keep-messages

Preserve the source mailbox

--program-id=fmt

Set program identifier for diagnostic purposes. See program-id, for a detailed discussion of this feature.

-r
--reverse

Reverse the sorting order

--tls[=bool]

Enable (default) or disable TLS support

-u
--uidl

Use UIDLs to avoid downloading the same message twice.

-P method-list
--owner=method-list

Define list of methods for setting ownership of the destination mailbox. See mailbox-ownership-methods, for a description of method-list. This option is useful only when running movemail as root.

-v
--verbose

Increase verbosity level.

2.7 readmsg — Extract Messages from a Folder

The readmsg utility extracts messages from a mailbox according to the criteria specified in the command line. These criteria are:

  1. A lone ‘*’ means “select all messages in the mailbox”.
  2. A list of message numbers may be specified. Values of ‘0’ and ‘$’ in the list both mean the last message in the mailbox. For example:
     
    readmsg 1 3 0
    

    extracts three messages from the folder: the first, the third, and the last.

  3. Finally, the selection may be some text to match. This will select a mail message which exactly matches the specified text. For example,
     
    readmsg staff meeting
    

    extracts the message which contains the words ‘staff meeting’. Note that it will not match a message containing ‘Staff Meeting’ – the matching is case sensitive. Normally only the first message which matches the pattern is printed.

2.7.1 Invocation of readmsg.

-a
--show-all

If a pattern is use for selection show all messages that match pattern by default only the first one is presented.

-d
--debug

Display mailbox debugging information.

-f mailbox
--folder=mailbox

Specified the default mailbox.

-h
--header

Show the entire header and ignore the weedlist.

-n
--no-header

Do not print the message header.

-p
--form-feed

Put form-feed (Control-L) between messages instead of newline.

-w weedlist
--weedlist=weedlist

A whitespace or coma separated list of header names to show per message. Default is ‘--weedlist="From Subject Date To CC Apparently-"’.

2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.

Following configuration statements affect the behavior of readmsg:

Readmsg Conf: header bool

If bool is ‘true’, display entire headers.

Readmsg Conf: weedlist str

Set the weedlist. The str argument is a string, containing a list of header names, separated by whitespace, commands or colons. This corresponds to the ‘--weedlist’ command line option (see section –weedlist).

Readmsg Conf: no-header bool

If bool is ‘true’, exclude all headers.

Readmsg Conf: form-feeds bool

If bool is ‘true’, output formfeed character between messages.

Readmsg Conf: folder url

Set the URL of the mailbox folder to read.

Readmsg Conf: show-all-match bool

If bool is ‘true’, print all messages matching pattern, not only the first.

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.

2.8 sieve

Sieve is a language for filtering e-mail messages at time of final delivery, described in RFC 3028. GNU Mailutils provides two implementations of this language: a stand-alone sieve interpreter and a sieve translator and filter. The following sections describe these utilities in detail.

2.8.1 A Sieve Interpreter

Sieve interpreter sieve allows to apply Sieve scripts to an arbitrary number of mailboxes. GNU sieve implements a superset of the Sieve language as described in RFC 3028. See section Sieve Language, for a description of the Sieve language. See section GNU Extensions, for a discussion of differences between the GNU implementation of Sieve and its standard.

Invoking sieve

The sieve invocation syntax is:

 
sieve [options] script

where script denotes the filename of the sieve program to parse, and options is one or more of the following:

-c
--compile-only

Compile script and exit.

--clear-library-path
--clearpath

Clear Sieve library path. See also clear-library-path.

--clear-include-path

Clear Sieve include path. See also clear-include-path.

-d[flags]
--debug[=flags]

Specify debug flags. The flags argument is a sequence of one or more of the following letters:

g Enable main parser traces
T Enable mailutils traces
P Trace network protocols
t Enable sieve trace
i Trace the program instructions
-D
--dump

Compile the script, dump disassembled code on standard output and exit.

-e address
--email address

Override the user email address. This is useful for reject and redirect actions. By default, the user email address is deduced from the user name and the full name of the machine where sieve is executed. See also email.

-I dir
--includedir=dir

Append directory dir to the list of directories searched for include files. See also include-path.

-f
--mbox-url=mbox

Mailbox to sieve (defaults to user's system mailbox). See also mbox-url.

-k
--keep-going

Keep on going if execution fails on a message. See also keep-going.

-L dir
--libdir=dir

Append directory dir to the list of directories searched for library files. See also library-path.

-n
--no-actions

Dry run: do not execute any actions, just print what would be done.

-t ticket
--ticket=ticket

Ticket file for mailbox authentication. See also ticket.

-v
--verbose

Log all actions executed. See also verbose.

Sieve Configuration

The behavior of sieve is affected by the following configuration statements:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
logging See section Logging Statement.
mailer See section Mailer Statement.

The following statements configure sieve-specific features:

Sieve Conf: sieve { ... }

This block statement configures search paths sieve uses to locate its loadable modules. See section Require Statement, for a detailed information of this feature.

This statement may contain the following sub-statements: clear-library-path, clear-include-path, library-path, include-path, which are described below.

Sieve Conf: clear-library-path bool

Used within the sieve block statement.

If bool is ‘true’, clear library search path.

Sieve Conf: clear-include-path bool

Used within the sieve block statement.

If bool is ‘true’, clear include search path.

Sieve Conf: library-path path

Used within the sieve block statement.

Add directories to sieve library search path. Argument is a string containing a colon-separated list of directories.

Sieve Conf: include-path path

Used within the sieve block statement.

Add directories to the include search path. Argument is a string containing a colon-separated list of directories.

Sieve Conf: keep-going bool

If bool is ‘true’, do not abort if execution of a Sieve script fails on a particular message.

Sieve Conf: mbox-url url

Sets URL of the mailbox to be processed.

Sieve Conf: ticket file

Sets the name of the ticket file for user authentication.

Sieve Conf: debug flags

Sets Sieve debug flags. See Logging and Debugging, for a detailed description.

Sieve Conf: verbose bool

If bool is ‘true’, log all executed actions.

Sieve Conf: line-info bool

If bool is ‘true’, print source locations along with action logs. This statement takes effect only if verbose true is also set.

Sieve Conf: email addr

Set user e-mail address. This is useful for reject and redirect actions. By default, the user email address is deduced from the user name and the full name of the machine where sieve is executed.

Logging and debugging

The default behavior of sieve is to remain silent about anything except errors. However, it is sometimes necessary to see which actions are executed and on which messages. This is particularly useful when debugging the sieve scripts. The ‘--verbose’ (‘-v’) option outputs log of every action executed.

Option ‘--debug’ allows to produce even more detailed debugging information. This option takes an argument specifying the debugging level to be enabled. The argument can consist of the following letters:

t

This flag enables sieve tracing. It means that every test will be logged when executed.

T

This flag enables debugging of underlying mailutils library.

P

Trace network protocols: produces log of network transactions executed while running the script.

g

Enable main parser traces. This is useful for debugging the sieve grammar.

i

Trace the program instructions. It is the most extensive debugging level. It produces the full execution log of a sieve program, showing each instruction and states of the sieve machine. It is only useful for debugging the code generator.

Note, that there should be no whitespace between the short variant of the option (‘-d’), and its argument. Similarly, when using long option (‘--debug’), its argument must be preceded by equal sign.

If the argument to ‘--debug’ is omitted, it defaults to ‘TPt’.

Option ‘--dump’ produces the disassembled dump of the compiled sieve program.

By default sieve output all diagnostics on standard error and verbose logs on standard output. This behaviour is changed when ‘--log-facility’ is given in the command line (). This option causes sieve to output its diagnostics to the given syslog facility.

Extending sieve

The basic set of sieve actions, tests and comparators may be extended using loadable extensions. Usual require mechanism is used for that.

When processing arguments for require statement, sieve uses the following algorithm:

  1. Look up the name in a symbol table. If the name begins with ‘comparator-’ it is looked up in the comparator table. If it begins with ‘test-’, the test table is used instead. Otherwise the name is looked up in the action table.
  2. If the name is found, the search is terminated.
  3. Otherwise, transform the name. First, any ‘comparator-’ or ‘test-’ prefix is stripped. Then, any character other than alphanumeric characters, ‘.’ and ‘,’ is replaced with dash (‘-’). The name thus obtained is used as a file name of an external loadable module.
  4. Try to load the module. The module is searched in the following search paths (in the order given):
    1. Mailutils module directory. By default it is ‘$prefix/lib/mailutils’.
    2. The value of the environment variable LTDL_LIBRARY_PATH.
    3. Additional search directories specified with the library-path statement (see library-path) in Sieve configuration file.
    4. Additional search directories specified with the. ‘--libdir’ command line option ().
    5. Additional search directories specified with the #searchpath Sieve directive (see #searchpath).
    6. System library search path: The system dependent library search path (e.g. on Linux it is set by the contents of the file ‘/etc/ld.so.conf’ and the value of the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH).

    The value of LTDL_LIBRARY_PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH must be a colon-separated list of absolute directories, for example, ‘"/usr/lib/mypkg:/lib/foo"’.

    In any of these directories, sieve first attempts to find and load the given filename. If this fails, it tries to append the following suffixes to the file name:

    1. the libtool archive extension ‘.la
    2. the extension used for native dynamic libraries on the host platform, e.g., ‘.so’, ‘.sl’, etc.
  5. If the module is found, sieve executes its initialization function (see below) and again looks up the name in the symbol table. If found, search terminates successfully.
  6. If either the module is not found, or the symbol wasn't found after execution of the module initialization function, search is terminated with an error status. sieve then displays the following diagnostic message:
     
    source for the required action NAME is not available
    

2.8.2 A Sieve to Scheme Translator and Filter

A Sieve to Scheme Translator sieve.scm translates a given Sieve script into an equivalent Scheme program and optionally executes it. The program itself is written in Scheme and requires presence of Guile version 1.8 or newer on the system. For more information on Guile refer to (guile)Top section `Overview' in The Guile Reference Manual.

-f filename
--file filename

Set input file name.

-o filename
--output filename

Set output file name

-L dirname
--lib-dir dirname

Set sieve library directory name

-d level
--debug level

Set debugging level

The Scheme programs produced by sieve.scm can be used with guimb or maidag.

2.9 guimb — A Mailbox Scanning and Processing Language

Guimb is for mailboxes what awk is for text files. It processes mailboxes, applying the user-supplied scheme procedures to each of them in turn and saves the resulting output in mailbox format.

The following configuration statements affect the behavior of guimb:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.

Specifying Scheme Program to Execute

The Scheme program or expression to be executed is passed to guimb via the following options:

-s file
--source file

Load Scheme source code from file.

-c expr
--code expr

Execute given scheme expression.

The above switches stop further argument processing, and pass all remaining arguments as the value of (command-line).

If the remaining arguments must be processed by guimb itself, use following options:

-e expr
--expression expr

Execute scheme expression.

-f file
--file file

Load Scheme source code from file.

You can specify both of them. In this case, the file is read first, then expr is executed. You may still pass any additional arguments to the script using ‘--guile-arg’ option.

Specifying Mailboxes to Operate Upon

There are four basic ways of passing mailboxes to guimb.

guimb [options] [mailbox...]

The resulting mailbox is not saved, unless the user-supplied scheme program saves it.

guimb [options] --mailbox defmbox

The contents of defmbox is processed and is replaced with the resulting mailbox contents. Useful for applying filters to user's mailbox.

guimb [options] --mailbox defmbox mailbox [mailbox...]

The contents of specified mailboxes is processed, and the resulting mailbox contents is appended to defmbox.

guimb [options] --user username [mailbox...]

The contents of specified mailboxes is processed, and the resulting mailbox contents is appended to the user's system mailbox. This allows to use guimb as a mail delivery agent.

If no mailboxes are specified in the command line, guimb reads and processes the system mailbox of the current user.

Passing Options to Scheme

Sometimes it is necessary to pass some command line options to the scheme procedure. There are three ways of doing so.

When using ‘--source’ (‘-s’) or ‘--code’ (‘-c’) options, all the rest of the command line following the option's argument is passed to Scheme program verbatim. This allows for making guimb scripts executable by the shell. If your system supports ‘#!’ magic at the start of scripts, add the following two lines to the beginning of your script to allow for its immediate execution:

 
#! /usr/local/bin/guimb -s
!#

(replace ‘/usr/local/bin/’ with the actual path to the guimb).

Otherwise, if you use ‘--file’ or ‘--expression’ options, the additional arguments may be passed to the Scheme program ‘-g’ (‘--guile-arg’) command line option. For example:

 
guimb --guile-arg -opt --guile-arg 24 --file progfile

In this example, the scheme procedure will see the following command line:

 
progfile -opt 24

Finally, if there are many arguments to be passed to Scheme, it is more convenient to enclose them in ‘-{’ and ‘-}’ escapes:

 
guimb -{ -opt 24 -} --file progfile

Command Line Option Summary

This is a short summary of the command line options available to guimb.

-d
--debug

Start with debugging evaluator and backtraces.

-e expr
--expression expr

Execute given Scheme expression.

-m path
--mail-spool=path

Set path to the mailspool directory

-f progfile
--file progfile

Read Scheme program from progfile.

-g arg
--guile-command arg

Append arg to the command line passed to Scheme program.

-{ ... -}

Pass all command line options enclosed between ‘-{’ and ‘-}’ to Scheme program.

-m
--mailbox mbox

Set default mailbox name.

-u
--user name

Act as local MDA for user name.

-h
--help

Display help message.

-v
--version

Display program version.

2.10 maidag

The name ‘maidag’ stands for Mail delivery agent. It is a general-purpose MDA offering a rich set of features. It can operate both in traditional mode, reading the message from its standard input, and in LMTP mode. Maidag is able to deliver mail to any mailbox format, supported by GNU Mailutils. These formats, among others, include ‘remote+smtp’, ‘remote+prog’ and ‘remote+sendmail’ which are equivalent to forwarding a message over SMTP to a remote node. Thus, maidag supersedes both mail.local and mail.remote utilities from GNU Mailutils versions prior to 2.0.

Maidag is also able to process incoming messages using Sieve, Scheme or Python scripts and, based on results of this processing, to take a decision on whether to actually deliver and where to deliver them. Due to its extensive scripting facilities, maidag offers much more flexibility than other popular MDAs, such as procmail.

2.10.1 Using maidag with Sendmail.

When used as a MDA with Sendmail, maidag must be invoked from the local mailer definition in the ‘sendmail.cf’ file. It must have the following flags set: ‘lswS’. These mean: the mailer is local, quote characters should be stripped off the address before invoking the mailer, the user must have a valid account on this machine and the userid should not be reset before calling the mailer. Additionally, the flags ‘fn’ may be specified to allow maidag to generate the usual ‘From ’ envelope instead of the one supplied by sendmail.

If you wish to use maidag with non-local authentication, such as SQL or LDAP, you also need to remove the ‘w’ flag, since in that case the user is not required to have a valid account on the machine that runs sendmail.

Here is an example of mailer definition in ‘sendmail.cf

 
Mlocal, P=/usr/local/sbin/maidag,
        F=lsDFMAw5:/|@qSPfhn9,
        S=EnvFromL/HdrFromL, R=EnvToL/HdrToL,
        T=DNS/RFC822/X-Unix,
        A=mail $u

To define local mailer in ‘mc’ source file, it will suffice to set:

 
define(`LOCAL_MAILER_PATH', `/usr/local/sbin/maidag')
define(`LOCAL_MAILER_ARGS', `mail $u')

2.10.2 Using maidag with Exim.

Using maidag with Exim is quite straightforward. The following example illustrates the definition of the appropriate transport and director in ‘exim.conf’:

 
# transport
maidag_pipe:
  driver = pipe
  command = /usr/local/sbin/maidag $local_part
  return_path_add
  delivery_date_add
  envelope_to_add
  
# director
maidag:
  driver = localuser
  transport = maidag_pipe

2.10.3 Using maidag with MeTA1.

MeTA1 (http://meta1.org) communicates with the delivery agent using LMTP.

LMTP mode is enabled in maidag by the ‘lmpt yes’ statement. The socket to listen on must be specified using server statement (see section Server Settings). For the purposes of this section, let's suppose maidag will listen on a UNIX socket ‘/var/spool/meta1/lmtpsock’. Then, the following (minimal) maidag configuration will do the job:

 
# Start in LMTP mode.
lmtp yes;
# Run as daemon.
mode daemon;
# Switch to this group after startup.
group meta1c;
# Configure server:
server unix:///var/spool/meta1/lmtpsock {
  transcript no;
};

To configure MeTA1 to use this socket, add the following statement to the ‘smtpc’ section in ‘/etc/meta1/meta1.conf’:

 
  LMTP_socket="lmtpsock";

2.10.4 Mailbox Quotas

Mailbox quota is a limit on the size of the mailbox. When a mailbox size reaches this limit, maidag stops accepting messages for this recipient and returns an error condition to the sender. The error code is accompanied by the following error message:

 
user: mailbox quota exceeded for this recipient

Furthermore, if accepting the incoming message would make the mailbox size exceed the quota, such a message will be rejected as well. In this case, the error message is:

 
user: message would exceed maximum mailbox size for this recipient

In both cases, the default return code will be ‘service unavailable’ (corresponding to the SMTP return code ‘550’), unless the following statement is present in the maidag configuration file:

 
exit-quota-tempfail yes;

in which case a temporary error will be returned.

The mailbox quota can be retrieved from the following sources:

  1. Authentication method.
  2. DBM file.
  3. SQL database.

2.10.4.1 Keeping Quotas in DBM File

To use DBM quota database, GNU Mailutils must be compiled with one of the following command line options: ‘--with-gdbm’, ‘--with-berkeley-db’, or ‘--with-ndbm’. Examine the output of maidag --show-config-options, if not sure.

The quota database should have the following structure:

Key

Key represents the user name. Special key ‘DEFAULT’ means default quota value, i.e. the one to be used if the user is not explicitly listed in the database.

Value

Mailbox quota for this user. If it is a number, it represents the maximum mailbox size in bytes. A number may optionally be followed by ‘kb’ or ‘mb’, meaning kilobytes and megabytes, respectively.

A special value ‘NONE’ means no mailbox size limit for this user.

Here is an example of a valid quota database

 
# Default quota value:
DEFAULT         5mb

# Following users have unlimited mailbox size
root            NONE
smith           NONE

# Rest of users
plog            26214400
karin           10mB

To use the DBM quota database, specify its absolute name using quota-db configuration statement, e.g.:

 
quota-db /etc/mail/quota.db;

2.10.4.2 Keeping Quotas in SQL Database

Configuration statement quota-query allows to specify a special query to retrieve the quota from the database. Currently (as of mailutils version 2.2) it is assumed that this table can be accessed using the credentials set in ‘sql’ configuration statement (see section SQL Statement).

For example, suppose you have the following quota table:

 
create table mailbox_quota (
  user_name varchar(32) binary not null,
  quota int,
  unique (user_name)
);

To retrieve user quota the following query can be used:

 
SELECT quota FROM mailbox_quota WHERE user_name='${user}'

There are no special provisions for specifying group quotas, similar to ‘DEFAULT’ in DBM databases. This is because group quotas can easily be implemented using SQL language. Maidag always uses the first tuple from the set returned by mailbox quota query. So, you may add a special entry to the mailbox_quota table that would keep the group quota. In the discussion below we assume that the user_name column for this entry is lexicographically less than any other user name in the table. Let's suppose the group quota name is ‘00DEFAULT’. Then the following query:

 
SELECT quota
FROM mailbox_quota
WHERE user_name IN ('${user}','00DEFAULT')
ORDER BY user_name DESC

will return two tuples if the user is found in mailbox_quota. Due to ORDER statement, the first tuple will contain the quota for the user, which will be used by maidag. On the other hand, if the requested user name is not present in the table, the above query will return a single tuple containing the group quota.

The following configuration statement instructs maidag to use this query for retrieving the user quota:

 
quota-query "SELECT quota "
            "FROM mailbox_quota "
            "WHERE user_name IN ('${user}','00DEFAULT') "
            "ORDER BY user_name DESC";

2.10.5 Maidag Scripting

Maidag can use global or per-user mail filters to decide whether to deliver the message, and where to deliver it. As of Mailutils version 2.2, such mail filters may be written in the following languages:

Mail filters to use are specified using ‘script’ configuration statement. The following meta-symbols can be used in its argument:

~
%h

Expands to the recipient home directory.

%u

Expands to the recipient user name.

By default, a filename extension decide which scripting language will be used. User can alter the choice using ‘language’ configuration statement. For example:

 
language "python"
script "~/.maidag-py-filter"

2.10.5.1 Sieve Maidag Filters

The file name of the Sieve filter to use is specified using ‘script’ configuration statement. For example, the following configuration statement:

 
script "~/.maidag.sv"

instructs maidag to use file ‘.maidag.sv’ in the recipient home directory as a Sieve filter.

Normal message delivery is attempted if execution of the Sieve code ended with keep action (either implicit or explicit).

Other Sieve actions are executed as described in Actions. For example, to deliver message to another mailbox, use the fileinto action.

Any modifications to headers or body of the message performed by the Sieve code will be visible in the delivered message.

2.10.5.2 Scheme Maidag Filters

The file name of the Scheme mail filter is specified using ‘script’ configuration statement. For example, the following configuration statement:

 
script "~/.maidag.scm"

instructs `maidag' to use file `.maidag.scm' in the recipient home directory as a Scheme filter.

2.10.5.3 Python Maidag Filters

The file name of the Python mail filter is specified using ‘script’ configuration statement. For example, the following configuration statement:

 
script "~/.maidag.py"

instructs `maidag' to use file `.maidag.py' in the recipient home directory as a Python filter.

A simple example of a mail filter written in Python:

 
from mailutils import *
import maidag
import re

msg = message.Message (maidag.message)
hdr = msg.header

try:
    if 'List-Post' in hdr and 'Received' in hdr \
       and hdr['Received'].find ('fencepost.gnu.org') != -1:

        # check envelope's sender address
        m = re.search (r'([\w\-]+)-bounces\+([\w]+)=.*',
                       msg.envelope.get_sender ())
        if m:
            lbox = m.group (1)
            user = m.group (2)
            # open destination mailbox and append message
            dst = mailbox.MailboxDefault ('~/Mail/%s' % lbox)
            dst.open ('ac')
            dst.append_message (msg)
            dst.close ()
            # set deleted flag so maidag will not deliver msg elsewhere
            msg.attribute.set_deleted ()
except Exception:
    pass

2.10.6 Forwarding

Forward file is a special file in the user's home directory that contains the email address of the mailbox where the user wants to forward his mail. Normally, forward files are processed by MTA. However, there are some MTA that lack this feature. One of them is MeTA1.

Maidag provides a forwarding feature that is useful to compensate the lack of it.

Name of the forward file is given using forward-file configuration statement. A common usage is:

 
forward-file .forward;

The forward file is always searched in the recipient home directory.

Before actually using the file, a number of safety checks are performed on it. If the file fails to pass one of these checks, no forwarding is performed and the message is delivered as usual. These checks can be configured using forward-file-checks statement. Its argument is a list of the following keywords:

groupwritablefile
file_iwgrp

The file must not be group writable.

worldwritablefile
file_iwoth

The file must not be world writable.

linkedfileinwritabledir
link

The file cannot be a symlink in a writable directory.

fileingroupwritabledir
dir_iwgrp

The file cannot reside in a group writable directory.

fileinworldwritabledir
dir_iwoth

The file cannot reside in a world writable directory.

all

All of the above checks.

The default is ‘forward-file-checks all’.

Each of these keywords may be prefixed by ‘no’ to disable this particular check. For example:

 
forward-file-checks (nodir_iwoth, nodir_iwgrp);

2.10.7 Delivering Messages to a URL.

When invoked with the ‘--url’ command line option, maidag treats its arguments as a list of mailbox URLs and attempts to deliver the message to each of them.

For example:

 
$ maidag --url maildir:///home/smith/Mail

2.10.8 Remote Mailbox Delivery

Maidag can be used to deliver mail to remote mailboxes, such as ‘imap’ or ‘remote+smtp’. If the mailbox URL is ‘remote+smtp’ or ‘remote+sendmail’, the message is actually forwarded over SMTP to the remote node, so maidag acts as a message transfer agent. For example:

 
$ maidag --url remote+smtp://10.10.1.100:24

This command line will send the message to the machine ‘10.10.1.100’ using port ‘24’ (private mail system).

The ‘remote+prog’ mailbox may be of special use. Delivering to this mailbox results in invoking the specified command with the given arguments and passing the message to its standard input. There are two ways to specify a ‘remote+prog’ mailbox:

remote+prog://program?args

Here, program is the absolute pathname of the program binary, and args are its arguments, separated by ‘&’ signs.

|program args

In this notation, args are command line arguments separated by white space.

In both cases, args do not include argv[0].

The ‘remote+prog’ mailbox may be used, in particular, to implement mailing lists with MeTA1.

For example, suppose that the maidag configuration contains:

 
auth {
  authorization sql:system;
  authentication generic:system;
}

sql {
  interface mysql;
  db mail;
  getpwnam "SELECT user as name, mailbox, "
           "'x' as passwd, 500 as uid, 2 as gid, "
           "'/nonexistent' as dir, '/sbin/nologin' as shell "
           "FROM userdb "
           "WHERE user='${user}'";
}

Then, the following entries in the ‘userdb’ table implement mailman@yourdomain mailing list:

 
mysql> select * from userdb;
+---------------------+---------------------------------------+
| user                | mailbox                               |
+---------------------+---------------------------------------+
| mailman             | |/usr/bin/mailman post mailman        |
| mailman-admin       | |/usr/bin/mailman admin mailman       |
| mailman-bounces     | |/usr/bin/mailman bounces mailman     |
| mailman-confirm     | |/usr/bin/mailman confirm mailman     |
| mailman-join        | |/usr/bin/mailman join mailman        |
| mailman-leave       | |/usr/bin/mailman leave mailman       |
| mailman-owner       | |/usr/bin/mailman owner mailman       |
| mailman-request     | |/usr/bin/mailman request mailman     |
| mailman-subscribe   | |/usr/bin/mailman subscribe mailman   |
| mailman-unsubscribe | |/usr/bin/mailman unsubscribe mailman |
+---------------------+---------------------------------------+

2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary

The behavior of maidag is affected by the following configuration statements:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
pam See section PAM Statement.
sql See section SQL Statement.
virtdomain See section Virtdomain Statement.
radius See section Radius Statement.
ldap See section LDAP Statement.
auth See section Auth Statement.
mailer See section Mailer Statement.
server See section Server Settings. Used only in LMTP mode.
acl See section ACL Statement.
tcp-wrappers See section Tcp-wrappers Statement.
Maidag Config: ex-multiple-delivery-success bool

In case of multiple delivery, exit with code 0 if at least one delivery has succeeded.

Maidag Config: ex-quota-tempfail bool

Indicate temporary failure if the recipient is over his mail quota. By default, permanent failure is returned. See section Mailbox Quotas.

Maidag Config: quota-db file

Set the name of DBM quota database file. See section Keeping Quotas in DBM File.

Maidag Config: sieve-filter pattern

Set file name or name pattern of the Sieve filter file. See section Sieve Maidag Filters.

Maidag Config: message-id-header name

When logging Sieve actions, identify messages by the value of this header.

Maidag Config: guile-filter pattern

File name or name pattern for Guile filter file. See section Scheme Maidag Filters.

Maidag Config: debug flags

Set additional debugging flags. Valid flags are:

g

Print guimb stack traces.

t

Enable sieve trace (MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_TRACE).

i

Enable sieve instructions trace (MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_INSTR).

l

Log executed Sieve actions.

Maidag Config: stderr bool

Log to stderr instead of syslog.

Maidag Config: forward-file file

Process forward file file. See section Forwarding.

Maidag Config: forward-file-checks list

Configure safety checks for the forward file. See section forward-file-checks.

Maidag Config: lmtp bool

Run in LMTP mode.

Maidag Config: group list

In LMTP mode, retain supplementary groups from list.

Maidag Config: listen url

In LMTP mode, listen on url. Valid URLs are: ‘tcp://host:port’ (note that port is mandatory), ‘file://socket-file-name’ or ‘socket://socket-file-name’.

Maidag Config: reuse-address bool

Reuse existing address (LMTP mode). Default is ‘yes’.

2.11 mimeview

For each file given in its command line, mimeview attempts to autodetect its type and invoke an appropriate file viewer.

To detect the file type, mimeview uses ‘mime.types’ file. This file is a part of Common UNIX Printing System, (mime.types(5))mime.types section `mime.types' in mime.types man page. By default mimeview searches for ‘mime.types’ in ‘$prefix/etc/cups/(2), however its exact location can be specified at runtime as well (see ‘--mimetypes’ below).

Once file MIME type is successfully determined, mimeview consults ‘mailcap’ files in order to determine how to display the file. It does so essentially in the same manner as metamail utility, i.e., it scans all files specified in METAMAIL environment variable until it finds an entry describing the desired file format or until the list of files is exhausted. If METAMAIL variable is not set, mimeview uses the following default path instead:

 
$HOME/.mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap:\
 /usr/etc/mailcap:/etc/mailcap:\
 /etc/mail/mailcap:/usr/public/lib/mailcap

2.11.1 Mimeview Invocation

The following table summarizes options specific for mimeview:

-a[type-list]
--no-ask[=type-list]

By default mimeview asks for confirmation before running interpreter to view a message. If this option is used without argument, it disables the default behavior for all message types. Otherwise, if argument type-list is given, it specifies a comma-separated list of MIME types for which no questions should be asked. Elements of this list may include shell-style globbing patterns, e.g. setting

 
--no-ask='text/*,image/jpeg'

will disable prompting before displaying any textual files, no matter what their subtype is, and before displaying files with type ‘image/jpeg’.

Notice, that when the long form is used, its argument must be separated from the option by a single equal sign, as shown in the example above. When the short form (‘-a’) is used, its argument must follow the option immediately, without any intervening whitespace, e.g. ‘-a'text/*'’).

-d[flags]
--debug[=flags]

Enables debugging output. Flags is a sequence of characters specifying the desired debugging level. Following characters are meaningful in flags:

g

Enables debugging of ‘mime.types’ parser

l

Enables debugging of ‘mime.types’ lexical analyzer (warning: produces very copious output)

1

Prints basic information about actions to be executed and reports about exit status of executed commands.

2

Additionally displays each file name along with its MIME type

3

Additionally traces the process of looking up the matching entry in mailcap files.

digits from 4 to 9

The same as 3, currently.

If flags are not given, the default ‘9’ is assumed.

--metamail[=file]

Run metamail to display files, instead of using the internal mechanisms. If file is specified, it is taken as metamail command line.

-h
--no-interactive
--print

This options tells mimeview that it should run in non-interactive mode. In this mode prompting is disabled, and the normal mailcap command field is not executed. Instead mimeview will execute the command specified in the print field. If there is nothing in the print field, the mailcap entry is ignored and the search continues for a matching mailcap entry that does have a print field.

Notice, that unlike in metamail -h, this option does not force mimeview to send the output to the printer daemon.

When used with ‘--metamail’ option, this option passes ‘-h’ flag to the invocation of metamail.

By default mimeview behaves as if given ‘--no-interactive’ option whenever its standard input is not a tty device.

-n
--dry-run

Do not do anything, just print what would be done. Implies ‘--debug=1’, unless the debugging level is set up explicitly.

-t file
--mimetypes file

Use file as ‘mime.types’ file. If file is a directory, use ‘file/mime.types

2.11.2 Mimeview Config

The following configuration statements affect the behavior of mimeview:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
Mimeview Config: debug number

Set mimeview debug level. See section –debug, for a description of debug levels.

Mimeview Config: mimetypes file

Read file instead of the default ‘mime.types’.

Mimeview Config: metamail program

Use program to display files.

2.12 POP3 Daemon

The pop3d daemon implements the Post Office Protocol Version 3 server.

pop3d has two operation modes:

Inetd

The server is started from ‘/etc/inetd.conf’ file:

 
pop3  stream tcp nowait  root  /usr/local/sbin/pop3d pop3d

This is the default operation mode.

Standalone

The server runs as daemon, forking a child for each new connection.

The server operation mode is configured using mode statement (see section mode).

2.12.1 Login delay

POP3 clients often login frequently to check for new mail. Each new connection implies authenticating the user and opening his maildrop and can be very resource consuming. To reduce server load, it is possible to impose a minimum delay between any two consecutive logins. This is called ‘LOGIN-DELAY’ capability and is described in RFC 2449.

As of version 2.2, GNU Mailutils pop3d allows to set global login delay, i.e. such enforcement will affect all POP3 users. If a user attempts to log in before the specified login delay expires, he will get the following error message:

 
-ERR [LOGIN-DELAY] Attempt to log in within the minimum login delay interval

The message will be issued after a valid password is entered. This prevents this feature from being used by malicious clients for account harvesting.

To enable the login delay capability, specify the minimum delay using login-delay configuration statement, e.g.:

 
login-delay 60;

The pop3d utility keeps each user's last login time in a special DBM file, called login statistics database, so to be able to use this feature, Mailutils must be compiled with DBM support. By default, the login statistics database is called ‘/var/run/pop3-login.db’. You can change its name using stat-file configuration statement:

 
login-delay 60;
stat-file /tmp/pop.login;

Notice, that there is no need to include the ‘.db’ suffix in the file name.

The login delay facility will be enabled only if pop3d is able to access the statistics database for both reading and writing. If it is not, it will report this using syslog and start up without login delay restrictions. A common error message looks like:

 
Unable to open statistics db: Operation not permitted

You can check whether your pop3d uses login delays by connecting to it and issuing the ‘CAPA’ command. If login delays are in use, there response will contain the string ‘LOGIN-DELAY n’, where n is the actual login delay value.

2.12.2 Auto-expire

Automatic expiration of messages allows you to limit the period of time users are permitted to keep their messages on the server. It is enabled by expire configuration statement:

expire n;

Enable automatic expiration of messages after n days.

The current implementation works as follows. When a message is downloaded by RETR or TOP command, it is marked with ‘X-Expire-Timestamp: n’ header, where n is current value of UNIX timestamp. The exact expiration mechanism depends on you. Mailutils allows you two options:

  1. Expired messages are deleted by pop3d upon closing the mailbox. You specify this mechanism using delete-expired configuration statement:
    delete-expired bool;

    If bool is ‘true’, delete expired messages after receiving the QUIT command.

  2. Expired messages remain in the mailbox after closing it. The system administrator is supposed to run a cron job that purges the mailboxes. Such a cron job can be easily implemented using sieve from GNU Mailutils and the following script:
     
    require "timestamp";
    # Replace "5" with the desired expiration period
    if timestamp :before "X-Expire-Timestamp" "now - 5 days"
      {
        discard;
      }
    

    This script will remove expired messages 5 days after the retrieval. Replace ‘5’ with the desired expiration period and make sure it equals the argument to expire configuration keyword.

The statement expire 0 means the client is not permitted to leave mail on the server. It always implies delete-expired true.

2.12.3 Bulletins

The bulletin feature allows you to send important announcements to all POP3 users without mailing them. It works by creating a bulletin source mailbox and sending the announcements to it.

After a user successfully authenticates, pop3d checks the last bulletin number the user receives. The bulletin number refers to the number of the bulletin message in the bulletin source mailbox. If the latter contains more messages, these are appended to the user mailbox.

The user last bulletin number can be kept in two places. First, it can be stored in file ‘.popbull’ in his home directory. Secondly, if Mailutils is compiled with DBM support, the numbers can be kept in a DBM file, supplied via bulletin-db configuration statement. If both the database and the ‘.popbull’ file are present, the data from the database take precedence.

To enable this feature, use the following configuration statements:

bulletin-source mbox

Set the URL of the bulletin source mailbox.

bulletin-db file

Set the name of the database file to keep last bulletin numbers in. Be sure not to specify ‘.db’ extension.

The following example instructs pop3d to look for the bulletin messages in MH folder ‘/var/spool/bull/mbox’ and to keep the database of last delivered bulletin numbers in ‘/var/spool/bull/numbers.db’:

 
bulletin-source mh:/var/spool/bull/mbox;
bulletin-db /var/spool/bull/numbers;

2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration

The following configuration file statements affect the behavior of pop3d.

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
logging See section Logging Statement.
pam See section PAM Statement.
sql See section SQL Statement.
virtdomain See section Virtdomain Statement.
radius See section Radius Statement.
ldap See section LDAP Statement.
auth See section Auth Statement.
server See section Server Settings.
acl See section ACL Statement.
tcp-wrappers See section Tcp-wrappers Statement.
Pop3d Conf: undelete bool

On startup, clear deletion marks from all the messages.

Pop3d Conf: expire n

Automatically expire read messages after n days. See section Auto-expire, for a detailed description.

Pop3d Conf: delete-expired bool

Delete expired messages upon closing the mailbox. See section Auto-expire, for a detailed description.

Pop3d Conf: tls-required bool

Always require STLS command before entering authentication phase.

Pop3d Conf: login-delay duration

Set the minimal allowed delay between two successive logins. See section Login delay, for more information.

Pop3d Conf: stat-file file

Set the name of login statistics file for the login-delay facility. See section Login delay, for more information.

Pop3d Conf: bulletin-source file

Get bulletins from the specified mailbox. See section Bulletins, for a detailed description.

Pop3d Conf: bulletin-db file

Set bulletin database file name. See section Bulletins, for a detailed description.

2.12.5 Command line options

The following table summarizes all pop3d command line options.

-d[number]
--daemon[=number]

Run in standalone mode. An optional number specifies the maximum number of child processes allowed to run simultaneously. When it is omitted, it defaults to 10 processes. Please note, that there should be no whitespace between the ‘-d’ and its parameter.

-i
--inetd

Run in inetd mode.

-h
--help

Display short help message and exit.

--foreground

Remain in foreground.

--tls[=bool]

Enable TLS. If optional argument is supplied and is ‘false’, then disable it.

--debug-auth

Enable debugging of authentication functions.

2.13 IMAP4 Daemon

GNU imap4d is a daemon implementing IMAP4 rev1 protocol for accessing and handling electronic mail messages on a server. It can be run either as a standalone program or from ‘inetd.conf’ file.

2.13.1 Namespace

GNU imap4d supports a notion of namespaces defined in RFC 2342. A namespace is a set of directories upon which the user has certain permissions. It should be understood that these permissions apply only if the underlying filesystem allows them.

The three namespaces supported by imap4d are:

Personal Namespace

A namespace that is within the personal scope of the authenticated user on a particular connection. The user has all permissions on this namespace.

Other Users' Namespace

A namespace that consists of mailboxes from the “Personal Namespaces” of other users. The user can read and list mailboxes from this namespace. However, he is not allowed to use ‘%’ and ‘*’ wildcards with LIST command, that is he can access a mailbox only if he knows exactly its location.

Shared Namespace

A namespace that consists of mailboxes that are intended to be shared amongst users and do not exist within a user's Personal Namespace. The user has all permissions on this namespace.

By default, imap4d starts with the following namespaces:

Personal Namespace

The home directory of the user, if exists.

Other Users' Namespace

Empty

Shared Namespace

Empty

Note, that this means that by default, a user won't be able to see or otherwise access mailboxes residing in the directories other than his own home.

To change these defaults, use shared-namespace and other-namespace configuration statements:

shared-namespace list

Set shared namespace.

other-namespace list

Set other users' namespace.

For both statements, the argument is a list of directories that belong to this namespace, e.g.:

 
shared-namespace (/var/spool/mail,/var/mail);

If during the session the user creates a mailbox within either of these namespaces, the mode of the mailbox is determined by the following configuration statements:

shared-mailbox-mode mode

Set file mode for mailboxes created in shared namespace.

other-mailbox-mode mode

Set file mode for mailboxes created in other users' namespace.

In both cases, the argument, mode is a list of symbolic mode settings, similar to that used by chmod. It is a list of comma-separated mode change commands. Each command begins with a letter ‘g’, which means set mode bits for file group, or ‘o’, which means set mode bits for other users (note, that there is no ‘u’ specifier, since user ownership of his mailbox cannot be changed). This letter is followed by an ‘=’ (or ‘+’), and a list of modes to be set. This list can contain only two letters: ‘r’ to set read permission, and ‘w’ to set write permission.

For example, the following statement sets read and write permissions for the group:

 
shared-namespace-mode g=rw;

2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.

The behavior of imap4d is altered by the following configuration statements:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
tls See section TLS Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
logging See section Logging Statement.
pam See section PAM Statement.
sql See section SQL Statement.
virtdomain See section Virtdomain Statement.
radius See section Radius Statement.
ldap See section LDAP Statement.
auth See section Auth Statement.
server See section Server Settings.
acl See section ACL Statement.
tcp-wrappers See section Tcp-wrappers Statement.
Imap4d Conf: shared-namespace list

Set shared namespace. List is a list of strings. See section Namespace, for a detailed description.

Imap4d Conf: other-namespace list

Set other users' namespace. List is a list of strings. See section Namespace, for a detailed description.

Imap4d Conf: shared-mailbox-mode str

Set file mode for mailboxes created within shared namespace. See section Namespace, for a detailed description.

Imap4d Conf: other-mailbox-mode str

Set file mode for mailboxes created within other users' namespace. See section Namespace, for a detailed description.

Imap4d Conf: login-disabled bool

Disable LOGIN command, if bool is ‘true’.

Imap4d Conf: create-home-dir bool

Create nonexistent user home directories. See also home-dir-mode, below.

Imap4d Conf: home-dir-mode mode

Set file mode for created user home directories. Mode is specified in octal.

The default value for mode is ‘700’ (‘drwx------’ in ls terms).

Imap4d Conf: tls-required bool

Require successful STARTTLS command before entering authentication phase.

Imap4d Conf: preauth mode

Configure PREAUTH mode. Valid arguments are:

prog:///program-name

Imap4d invokes an external program to authenticate the connection. The command line is obtained from the supplied string, by expanding the following meta-variables:

${client_address}

Remote IP address in dotted-quad notation;

${client_port}

Remote port number;

${server_address}

Local IP address;

${server_port}

Local port number.

If the connection is authenticated, the program should print the user name, followed by a newline character, on its standard output and exit with code ‘0’.

Otherwise, it should exit with a non-zero exit code.

ident[://:port]

The remote machine is asked about the requester identity using the identification protocol (RFC 1413). Both plaintext and DES encrypted replies are understood. Optional port specifies the port to use, if it differs from the default ‘113’. It can be either a decimal port number or a symbolic name of a service, listed in ‘/etc/services’.

stdio

PREAUTH mode is enabled automatically if imap4d is started from command line in interactive mode (‘-i’ command line option). The current login name is used as the user name.

Imap4d Conf: preauth-only bool

If bool is ‘true’, use only preauth mode. If unable to setup it, disconnect immediately.

Imap4d Conf: ident-keyfile file

Set DES keyfile for decoding encrypted ident responses. Used with ‘ident://’ preauth mode.

Imap4d Conf: ident-encrypt-only bool

Use only encrypted IDENT responses.

Imap4d Conf: id-fields list

Set list of fields to return in response to ID command.

Valid field names are:

name

Package name (‘GNU Mailutils’).

version

Package version (‘2.2’).

vendor

Vendor name (‘GNU’).

support-url

The string ‘http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils

address

The string ‘51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA’.

os

OS name.

os-version

OS version number.

command

Name of the imap4d binary.

arguments

Invocation command line.

environment

List of environment variables with their values.

2.13.3 Starting imap4d

imap4d may run either in standalone or in inetd operation modes. When run in “standalone” mode, the server disconnects from the terminal and runs as a daemon, forking a child for each new connection.

The “inetd” mode allows to start the server from ‘/etc/inetd.conf’ file. This is the default operation mode.

 
imap4  stream tcp nowait  root  /usr/local/sbin/imap4d imap4d

Command Line Options

-d[number]
--daemon[=number]

Run in standalone mode. An optional number specifies the maximum number of child processes the daemon is allowed to fork. When it is omitted, it defaults to 20 processes. Please note, that there should be no whitespace between the ‘-d’ and its parameter.

-h
--help

Display short help message and exit.

-i
--inetd

Run in inetd mode.

--foreground

Run in foreground.

--preauth

Start in preauth mode

--tls[=bool]

Enable TLS support

--debug-auth

Debug authentication functions.

-v
--version

Display program version and exit.

2.14 Comsat Daemon

Comsatd is the server which receives reports of incoming mail and notifies users, wishing to get this service. It can be started either from ‘inetd.conf’ or as a standalone daemon.

2.14.1 Starting comsatd

Comsatd uses following option groups: , , .

-C file
--convert-config=file

Convert the configuration file file to the new format. File must be a comsatd configuration file in Mailutils v. 1.x format. The converted file is printed on the standard output. For example, the following command can be used to convert old comsatd configuration file to new format:

 
$ comsatd --convert-config=/etc/comsatd.conf > /etc/mailutils.d/comsatd
-d
--daemon

Run as a standalone daemon.

-i
--inetd

The server is started from ‘/etc/inetd.conf’ file:

 
comsat dgram  udp wait  root  /usr/sbin/comsatd \
comsatd -c /etc/comsat.conf

This is the default operation mode.

-t
--test

Test mode. In this mode, comsatd takes two arguments: URL of a mailbox and QID of the message from that mailbox, e.g.:

 
$ comsatd --test /var/mail/root 34589

2.14.2 Configuring comsatd

Following configuration statements affect the behavior of comsatd:

Statement Reference
debug See section Debug Statement.
logging See section Logging Statement.
mailbox See section Mailbox Statement.
locking See section Locking Statement.
acl See section ACL Statement.

2.14.2.1 General Settings

These statements control the general behavior of the comsat daemon:

Comsatd Conf: max-lines number

Set maximum number of message body lines to be output.

Comsatd Conf: allow-biffrc bool

Enable or disable processing of user's ‘.biffrc’ file. By default, it is enabled.

2.14.2.2 Security Settings

These statements control the way comsatd fights possible flooding attacks.

Comsatd Conf: max-requests number

Set maximum number of incoming requests per ‘request-control-interval’.

Comsatd Conf: request-control-interval duration

Set the request control interval.

Comsatd Conf: overflow-delay-time duration

Set initial amount of time to sleep, after the first overflow occurs.

Comsatd Conf: overflow-control-interval duration

Set overflow control interval. If two consecutive overflows happen within that interval, the overflow-delay-time is doubled.

2.14.3 A per-user Configuration File

By default, when a notification arrives, comsatd prints subject, from headers and the first five lines from the new message to the user's tty. The user is allowed to change this behavior by using his own configuration file. This file should be located in the user's home directory and should be named ‘.biffrc’. It must be owned by the user and have its permissions bits set to 0600. (Please note, that the use of per-user configuration files may be disabled, by specifying ‘allow-biffrc no’ in the main configuration file, see see section Configuring comsatd).

The ‘.biffrc’ file consists of a series of statements. Each statement occupies one line and defines an action to be taken upon arrival of a new mail. Very long lines may be split using ‘\’ as the last character on the line. As usual, comments may be introduced with ‘#’ character.

The actions specified in ‘.biffrc’ file are executed in turn. The following actions are defined:

beep

Produce an audible signal.

echo [-n] string [string...]

Output the arguments to the user's terminal device. If several arguments are given they will be output separated by single spaces. The newline character will be printed at the end of the output, unless the ‘-n’ option is used.

exec prog arglist

Execute program prog with arguments from arglist. prog must be specified with absolute pathname. It may not be a setuid or setgid program.

In the description above, string denotes any sequence of characters. This sequence must be enclosed in a pair of double-quotes, if it contains whitespace characters. The ‘\’ character inside a string starts a C escape sequence. Following meta-characters may be used in strings:

$u

Expands to username

$h

Expands to hostname

$H{name}

Expands to value of message header ‘name’.

$B(c,l)

Expands to message body. c and l give maximum number of characters and lines in the expansion. When omitted, they default to 400, 5.

Example I

Dump to the user's terminal the contents of ‘From’ and ‘Subject’ headers followed by at most 5 lines of message body.

 
echo "Mail to \a$u@$h\a\n---\n\
From: $H{from}\n\
Subject: $H{Subject}\n\
---\n\
$B(,5)\
---\n"

The above example can also be written as:

 
echo Mail to \a$u@$h\a
echo ---
echo From: $H{From}
echo Subject: $H{Subject}
echo ---
echo $B(,5)
echo ---

Example II

Produce a bell, then pop up the xmessage window on display :0.0 with the text formatted in the same manner as in the previous example.

 
beep
exec /usr/X11R6/bin/xmessage \
-display :0.0 -timeout 10 "Mail to $u@$h \n---\n\
From: $H{from}\n\
Subject: $H{Subject}\n\
---\n\
$B(,5)\
---\n"

2.15 MH — The MH Message Handling System

The primary aim of this implementation is to provide an interface between Mailutils and Emacs using mh-e module.

To use Mailutils MH with Emacs, add the following line to your site-start.el or .emacs file:

(load "mailutils-mh")

For the information about the current state of Mailutils MH implementation please refer to file ‘mh/TODO’ in the Mailutils distribution directory.

[FIXME]

2.15.1 Major differences between Mailutils MH and other MH implementations

  1. All programs use usual GNU long options. The support for MH single-dash options is provided for backward compatibility;
  2. UUCP addresses are not supported;
  3. Mailutils supports a set of new format specifications (see section New and Differing MH Format Specifications);
  4. Mailutils provides a set of new profile variables (see section New MH Profile Variables);
  5. Several programs behave differently (see section Differences in MH Program Behavior);

2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications

MH Format: string decode (string str)

Decodes the input string str as per RFC 2047. Useful in printing ‘From:’, ‘To:’ and ‘Subject:’ headers.

Notice that, unlike the similar NMH function, decode checks the value of the global profile variable Charset (see Charset variable) to determine the charset to output the result in. If this variable is not set, decode returns its argument without any change. If this variable is set to auto, decode tries to determine the charset name from the setting of LC_ALL environment variable. Otherwise, the value of Charset is taken to be the name of the character set.

MH Format: string package ()

Returns package name (string ‘mailutils’).

MH Format: string package_string ()

Returns full package string (e.g. ‘GNU Mailutils 2.1’)

MH Format: string version ()

Returns mailutils version.

MH Format: string unre (string str)

The function removes any leading whitespace and eventual ‘Re:’ prefix from its argument. Useful for creating subjects in reply messages:

 
  %<{subject}Subject: Re: %(unre{subject})\\n%>

MH Format: void reply_regex (string r)

Sets the regular expression used to recognize reply messages. The argument r should be a POSIX extended regular expression. Matching is case insensitive.

For example, the following invocation

 
  %(reply_regex ^\(re|aw|ang|odp\)\(\\[[0-9]+\\]\)?:[[:blank:]])

corresponds to English ‘Re’, Polish ‘Odp’, Norwegian ‘Aw’ or German ‘Ang’, optionally followed by a number in brackets, followed by colon and any amount of whitespace. Notice proper quoting of the regex metacharacters.

See also Reply-Regex (see Reply-Regex variable) and isreply (see isreply MH function) below.

MH Format: boolean isreply ([string str])

If str is not given, the value of ‘Subject:’ header is taken.

The function returns true if its argument matches the “reply subject” regular expression. This expression is set via the global profile variable Reply-Regex (see Reply-Regex variable) or via the format function reply_regex.

This function is useful for creating ‘Subject:’ headers in reply messages. For example, consider the following construction:

 
%<{subject}%(lit)%<(isreply)%?\
(profile reply-prefix)%(concat)%|%(concat Re:)%>\
%(concat{subject})%(printhdr Subject: )\n%>

If the ‘Subject:’ header already contained reply prefix, this construct leaves it unchanged. Otherwise it prepends to it the value of Reply-Prefix profile variable, or, if it is unset, the string ‘Re:’.

This expression is used in default ‘replcomps’ and ‘replgroupcomps’ files.

MH Format: boolean rcpt (‘to’ | ‘cc’ | ‘me’ | ‘all’)

This function returns true if the given element is present in the recipient mask (as modified by ‘--cc’ or ‘--nocc’ options) and false otherwise. It is used in default formats for repl and comp, e.g.:

 
%(lit)%<(rcpt to)%(formataddr{to})%>

Notice that this means that usual ‘replcomps’ file will be ignoring ‘--cc’ and ‘--nocc’ options, unless it has been modified as shown above.

MH Format: string concat ()

Appends whitespace + arg to string register.

MH Format: string printhdr (string str)

Prints the value of string register, prefixed by str. The output is formatted as a RFC 822 header, i.e. it is split at whitespace characters nearest to the width boundary and each subsequent segment is prefixed with horizontal tabulation.

MH Format: string in_reply_to ()

Generates the value for ‘In-reply-to:’ header according to RFC 2822.

MH Format: string references ()

Generates the value for ‘References:’ header according to RFC 2822.

2.15.1.2 New MH Profile Variables

Variable: MH Variable string Charset

Controls the character set in which the components decoded via the decode (see decode function) format function should be output.

Variable: MH Variable string Reply-Regex

Keeps the regular expression used to recognize reply messages. The argument should be a POSIX extended regular expression. Matching is case insensitive.

For more information, please see See reply_regex function.

2.15.1.3 Differences in MH Program Behavior

burst

The utility is able to burst both RFC 934 digest messages and MIME multipart messages. It provides two additional command line options: ‘--recurse’ and ‘--length’.

The ‘--recurse’ option instructs the utility to recursively expand the digest.

The ‘--length’ option can be used to set the minimal encapsulation boundary length for RFC 934 digests. Default length is 1, i.e. encountering one dash immediately following a newline triggers digest decoding. It is OK for messages that follow RFC 934 specification. However, many user agents do not precisely follow it, in particular, they often do not escape lines starting with a dash by ‘- ’ sequence. Mailman is one of such agents. To cope with such digests you can set encapsulation boundary length to a higher value. For example, bounce --length=8 has been found to be sufficient for most Mailman-generated digests.

comp

Understands ‘--build’ option.

fmtdump

This command is not provided. Use ‘fmtcheck’ instead.

mhl

If the argument to ignores contains more than one component name it must be enclosed in double-quotes. Dangling equal sign is an error, to set a string variable to the empty value assign it an empty string, e.g.: overflowtext="" (see the supplied ‘mhl.format’ file).

Interactive prompting is not yet implemented.

mhn
mhparam

The ‘--all’ mode does not display commented out entries.

repl

Understands ‘--use’ option. Disposition shell provides use command.

rmm
  1. Different behaviour if one of the messages in the list does not exist:

    Mailutils rmm does not delete any messages. Standard rmm in this case deletes all messages preceding the non-existent one.

  2. The rmmproc profile component is not used.
pick

The non-standard command line syntax ‘--field string’), where field is any string, is deprecated. It is recognized only if pick is called from within another program, so that existing application continue to work. Please use the following syntax instead:

 
pick --component field --pattern string

New command line option ‘--cflags’ allows to control the type of regular expressions used. The option must occur right before ‘--pattern’ or ‘--component’ option (or one of its aliases, like ‘--cc’, ‘--from’, etc.)

The argument to this option is a string of type specifications:

B Use basic regular expressions
E Use extended regular expressions
I Ignore case
C Case sensitive

Default is ‘EI’.

The flags remain in effect until the next occurrence of ‘--cflags’ option.

Sample usage:

 
pick --cflag BC --subject '*a string' 

The date comparison options (‘--before’ and ‘--after’ accept date specifications in a wide variety of formats, e.g.:

 
pick --after 20030301
pick --after 2003-03-01
pick --after 01-mar-2003
pick --after 2003-mar-01
pick --before '1 year ago'
etc...
refile
  1. Linking messages between folders goes against the logic of Mailutils, so refile never makes links even if called with ‘--link’ option. The latter is actually a synonym for ‘--copy’, which preserves the original message.
  2. The ‘--preserve’ option is not implemented. It is retained for backward compatibility only.
  3. Message specs and folder names may be interspersed.
sortm

New option ‘--numfield’ specifies numeric comparison for the given field.

Any number of ‘--datefield’, ‘--textfield’ and ‘--numfield’ options may be given, thus allowing to build sort criteria of arbitrary complexity.

The order of ‘--.*field’ options sets the ordering priority. This differs from the behaviour of the standard sortm, which always orders datefield-major, textfield-minor.

Apart from sorting the mailfolder the following actions may be specified:

--list

List the ordered messages using a format string given by ‘--form’ or ‘--format’ option.

--dry-run

Do not actually sort messages, rather print what would have been done. This is useful for debugging purposes.

2.16 mailutils-config — Get the Information about the Mailutils Build

This program is designed for developers wishing to link their programs against libmailutils. It allows to examine the particulars of the current build of Mailutils and to get the command line parameters necessary for compiling and linking an application with Mailutils libraries.

Getting Compiler Flags

When invoked with the option ‘--compile’, or its short form ‘-c’, mailutils-config prints the flags that must be given to the compiler for compiling the program using Mailutils functions. An example usage:

 
cc -omyprog.o `mailutils-config --compile` myprog.c

Getting Loader Flags

The ‘--link’, or its short form ‘-l’ prints to the standard output the loader flags necessary to link a program against Mailutils libraries.

When invoked without arguments, it produces the flags necessary to link against the basic library of Mailutils: ‘libmailutils’. Arguments may be given that alter this behavior. These are:

auth

Print flags to link against ‘libmu_auth’, the library adding new authentication methods to ‘libmailutils’.

guile

Print flags to link against ‘libmu_scm’, the Guile interface library.

mbox

Link against mbox format library.

mh

Link against mh format library.

maildir

Link against maildir format library.

mailer

Link against mailer library.

imap

Link against imap format library.

pop

Link against pop format library.

all

Link against all Mailutils format libraries.

The order of arguments does not matter.

For example, if you wrote a program ‘myprog.c’ that uses standard UNIX mailbox format, MH format and the Guile interface, then you would link it with the following command:

 
cc -omyprog myprog.o `mailutils-config --link mbox mh guile`

Obtaining General Build Information

The ‘--info’, or ‘-i’ retrieves the options (flags) used when building Mailutils. It may be used with or without arguments.

When used without arguments, it prints the list of all build flags, e.g.:

 
$ mailutils-config --info
VERSION=2.2
SYSCONFDIR=/usr/local/etc
MAILSPOOLDIR=/var/mail/
SCHEME=mbox
LOG_FACILITY=mail
USE_LIBPAM
HAVE_LIBLTDL
WITH_GDBM
WITH_GNUTLS
WITH_GSASL
WITH_GUILE
WITH_PTHREAD
WITH_READLINE
HAVE_MYSQL
ENABLE_VIRTUAL_DOMAINS
ENABLE_IMAP
ENABLE_POP
ENABLE_MH
ENABLE_MAILDIR
ENABLE_SMTP
ENABLE_SENDMAIL

When this option is used in conjunction with the ‘--verbose’ option, a short description is printed to the right of each keyword, e.g.:

 
$ mailutils-config --info --verbose
VERSION=1.9.93             - Version of this package
SYSCONFDIR=/usr/local/etc  - System configuration directory
MAILSPOOLDIR=/var/mail/    - Default mail spool directory
SCHEME=mbox                - Default mailbox type
LOG_FACILITY=mail          - Default syslog facility
USE_LIBPAM                 - PAM support
HAVE_LIBLTDL               - a portable `dlopen' wrapper library
WITH_GDBM                  - GNU DBM
…

This option also accepts any number of arguments. When these are given, each argument is treated as a name of a build flag. Mailutils-config checks if such a flag was defined and prints its full name if so. It exits with zero code if all the flags given on the command line are defined. Otherwise, it exits with code of 1.

The comparison of the flag names is case-insensitive. The arguments given need not include the leading prefix (i.e. the characters up to and including the first underscore character).

Given the previous example, the invocation

 
$ mailutils --info readline use_libpam pop

will produce the following output:

 
WITH_READLINE
USE_LIBPAM
ENABLE_POP

and will exit with a zero status.

The following command:

 
$ mailutils --info readline gssapi pop

will exit with status 1, and will print:

 
WITH_READLINE
ENABLE_POP

since WITH_GSSAPI flag is not defined.

The flags and their meanings are:

USE_LIBPAM

The Mailutils uses PAM libraries.

HAVE_LIBLTDL

The GNU wrapper library ‘libltdl’ is present and is used by Mailutils. See (libtool)Using libltdl section `Using libltdl' in Using libltdl, for more information on ‘libltdl’ library.

WITH_BDB2

Support for Berkeley DB is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-db2’ option).

WITH_NDBM

Support for NDBM is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-ndbm’ option).

WITH_OLD_DBM

Support for old style DBM is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-dbm’ option).

WITH_GDBM

Support for GNU DBM is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-gdbm’ option). See (gdbm)Top section `Introduction' in The GNU DBM Manual, for more information about this library.

WITH_GNUTLS

Support for GnuTLS (a Transport Layer Security Library) is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-gnutls’ option).

WITH_GSASL

Support for GNU SASL is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-gsasl’ option). See (gsasl)Top section `Introduction' in The GNU SASL Manual, for more information about this library.

WITH_GSSAPI

Support for GSSAPI is compiled in (the package was configured with ‘--with-gssapi’ option).

WITH_GUILE

Support for Guile extension language is built (the package was configured with ‘--with-guile’ option). See (guile)Top section `Overview' in The Guile Reference Manual, for more information about Guile.

WITH_PTHREAD

The POSIX thread support is compiled in.

WITH_READLINE

The readline support is enabled (the package was configured with ‘--with-readline’ option). See (readline)Top section `Top' in The GNU Readline Library, for more information.

HAVE_MYSQL

Authentication via MySQL is supported (the package was configured with ‘--enable-mysql’ option).

ENABLE_VIRTUAL_DOMAINS

Support for mail virtual domains is enabled (the package was configured with ‘--enable-virtual-domains’ option).

ENABLE_IMAP

Support for IMAP4 protocol is enabled.

ENABLE_POP

Support for POP3 protocol is enabled.

ENABLE_MH

Support for mailboxes in MH format is enabled.

ENABLE_MAILDIR

Support for mailboxes in MAILDIR format is enabled.

ENABLE_SMTP

Support for SMTP mailer is enabled.

ENABLE_SENDMAIL

Support for Sendmail mailer is enabled.

3. Mailutils Libraries

3.1 Framework

Wherever the mail is and whatever format it is stored in, it is operated upon using the same set of functions. To unified the C API, GNU Mailutils offers a heteroclite set of objects that work in aggregation to do operations on emails. Each object does a specific task and delegates non-related tasks to others. The object comes alive by specifying a URL parameter when created, it will indicate the storage format or protocol (POP3, IMAP4, MH, MAILDIR, etc ..).

 
                          mu_folder_t                  mu_url_t
  -/var/mail-    +- .. ->+-------------------+   +-->+------------+
 (  alain *-)-+  |       |   mu_url_t      *-|---+   |   port     |
  ----------  |  |       |-------------------|       |   hostname |
 (  jakob *-)-+--+       |   mu_auth_t     *-|---+   |   file     |
  ----------  |          |-------------------|   |   |   ...      |
 (  jeff  *-)-+          |   mu_stream_t     |   |   +------------+
  ----------  |          |-------------------|   |
 (  shaleh*-)-+          |   .....           |   |    mu_auth_t
  ----------             |-------------------|   +-->+-------------+
                     +---|-* mu_mailbox_t[]  |       | mu_ticket_t |
  mu_mailbox_t       |   +-------------------+       +-------------+
 +-------------------+
 |   mu_locker_t  *--|-------------+
 |-------------------|             |
 |   mu_url_t        |             |          mu_locker_t
 |-------------------|             +-------->+---------+
 |   mu_stream_t     |                       | lock    |
 |-------------------|                       | unlock  |
 |  mu_message_t[] *-|-------+               +---------+
 +-------------------+       |                     mu_envelope_t
                             |          +-------->+-----------+
  mu_message_t               |          |         | date      |
 +-------------------+<------+          |         | from      |
 |   mu_envelope_t *-|------------------+         | to        |
 |-------------------|              mu_header_t   +-----------+
 |   mu_header_t   *-|------------>+-----------------+
 |-------------------|             |   mu_stream_t   |
 |   mu_body_t     *-|----+        +-----------------+
 +-------------------+    |    mu_body_t
                          +-->+-----------------+
                              |   mu_stream_t   |
                              +-----------------+

As an example, here is a simplified version of from command. It lists the ‘From’ and ‘Subject’ headers of every mail in a mailbox.

 
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>

#include <mailutils/mailutils.h>

int
main (int argc, const char **argv)
{
  char *from;
  char *subject;
  mu_mailbox_t mbox;
  size_t msgno, total = 0;
  int status;

  /* Register the formats. */
  mu_register_all_mbox_formats ();

  status = mu_mailbox_create_default (&mbox, argv[1]);
  if (status != 0)
    {
      mu_error ("mu_mailbox_create: %s", mu_strerror (status));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  status = mu_mailbox_open (mbox, MU_STREAM_READ);
  if (status != 0)
    {
      mu_error ("mu_mailbox_open: %s", mu_strerror (status));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  mu_mailbox_messages_count (mbox, &total);

  for (msgno = 1; msgno <= total; msgno++)
    {
      mu_message_t msg;
      mu_header_t hdr;

      if ((status = mu_mailbox_get_message (mbox, msgno, &msg)) != 0
          || (status = mu_message_get_header (msg, &hdr)) != 0)
        {
          mu_error ("Error message: %s", mu_strerror (status));
          exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
        }

      if (mu_header_aget_value (hdr, MU_HEADER_FROM, &from))
        from = strdup ("(NO FROM)");

      if (mu_header_aget_value (hdr, MU_HEADER_SUBJECT, &subject))
        subject = strdup ("(NO SUBJECT)");

      printf ("%s\t%s\n", from, subject);
      free (from);
      free (subject);
    }

  status = mu_mailbox_close (mbox);
  if (status != 0)
    {
      mu_error ("mu_mailbox_close: %s", mu_strerror (status));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  mu_mailbox_destroy (&mbox);
  return 0;
}

Here is a sample output produced by this program:

 
% ./sfrom pop://alain@localhost
Passwd: xxxx
Jim Meyering <meyering@foo.org>      fetish(shellutils) beta
François Pinard <pinard@bar.org> recode new alpha
…

3.1.1 Folder

 
/* Prefix mu_folder_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/folder.h>

 
                             mu_folder_t                mu_url_t
  -/var/mail-    +---//--->/-------------------\   +-->/-----------\
 (  alain *-)-+  |         |  mu_url_t       *-|---+   |  port     |
  ----------  |  |         |-------------------+       |  hostname |
 (  jakob *-)-+--+         |  mu_observer_t  *-|       |  file     |
  ----------  |            |-------------------+       |  ...      |
 (  jeff  *-)-+            |  mu_stream_t      |       \-----------/
  ----------  |            |-------------------|
 (  sean  *-)-+            |  mu_auth_t        |
  ----------               |-------------------|
                           |  mu_mailbox_t(1)  |
                           |-------------------|
                           |  mu_mailbox_t(2)  |
                           |  ......           |
                           |  mu_mailbox_t(n)  |
                           \-----------------/

Data structures:

 
struct mu_list_response
{
  int type;
  int separator;
  char *name;
};

Function: int mu_folder_create (mu_folder_t *, const char *url)
Function: void mu_folder_destroy (mu_folder_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_open (mu_folder_t, int flag)
Function: int mu_folder_close (mu_folder_t)
Function: int mu_folder_delete (mu_folder_t, const char *mailbox)
Function: int mu_folder_rename (mu_folder_t, const char *, const char *mailbox)
Function: int mu_folder_subscribe (mu_folder_t, const char *mailbox)
Function: int mu_folder_unsubscribe (mu_folder_t, const char *mailbox)
Function: int mu_folder_list (mu_folder_t, const char *ref, const char *wcard, size_t size, mu_list_t *list)
Function: int mu_folder_lsub (mu_folder_t, const char *ref, const char *wcard, mu_list_t *list)
Function: int mu_folder_get_stream (mu_folder_t, mu_stream_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_set_stream (mu_folder_t, mu_stream_t)
Function: int mu_folder_get_observable (mu_folder_t, mu_observable_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_has_debug (mu_folder_t)
Function: int mu_folder_get_debug (mu_folder_t, mu_debug_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_set_debug (mu_folder_t, mu_debug_t)
Function: int mu_folder_get_authority (mu_folder_t, mu_authority_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_set_authority (mu_folder_t, mu_authority_t)
Function: int mu_folder_get_url (mu_folder_t, mu_url_t *)
Function: int mu_folder_set_url (mu_folder_t, mu_url_t)

3.1.2 Mailbox

 
/* Prefix mu_mailbox_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/mailbox.h>
Data Type: mu_mailbox_t

The mu_mailbox_t object is used to hold information and it is an opaque data structure to the user. Functions are provided to retrieve information from the data structure.

 
                             mu_mailbox_t               mu_url_t
  -/var/mail-    +---//--->/------------------\   +-->/-----------\
 (  alain   )    |         |  mu_url_t      *-|---+   |  port     |
  ----------     |         |------------------+       |  hostname |
 (  jakob *-)----+         |  mu_observer_t *-|       |  file     |
  ----------               |------------------+       |  ...      |
 (  jeff    )              |  mu_stream_t     |       \-----------/
  ----------               |------------------|
 (  sean    )              |  mu_locker_t     |
  ----------               |------------------|
                           |  mu_message_t(1) |
                           |------------------|
                           |  mu_message_t(2) |
                           |  ......          |
                           |  mu_message_t(n) |
                           \------------------/
Function: int mu_mailbox_create (mu_mailbox_t *mbox, const char *name)

The function mu_mailbox_create allocates and initializes mbox. The concrete mailbox type instantiate is based on the scheme of the url name.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERR_OUT_PTR_NULL

The pointer mbox supplied is NULL.

MU_ERR_NO_HANDLER

The url name supplied is invalid or not supported.

EINVAL
ENOMEM

Not enough memory to allocate resources.

Function: int mu_mailbox_create_default (mu_mailbox_t *mbox, const char *name)

Create a mailbox with mu_mailbox_create() based on the environment variable MAIL or the string formed by _PATH_MAILDIR/user" or LOGNAME if user is null,

Function: void mu_mailbox_destroy (mu_mailbox_t *mbox)

Destroys and releases resources held by mbox.

Function: int mu_mailbox_open (mu_mailbox_t mbox, int flag)

A connection is open, if no stream was provided, a stream is created based on the mbox type. The flag can be OR'ed. See stream_create() for flag's description.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EAGAIN
EINPROGRESS

Operation in progress.

EBUSY

Resource busy.

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL or flag is invalid.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory.

Function: int mu_mailbox_close (mu_mailbox_t mbox)

The stream attach to mbox is closed.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_flush (mu_mailbox_t mbox, int expunge)
Function: int mu_mailbox_get_folder (mu_mailbox_t mbox, folder_t *folder)

Get the folder.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_set_folder (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_folder_t folder)
Function: int mu_mailbox_uidvalidity (mu_mailbox_t mbox, unsigned long *number);

Give the uid validity of mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_uidnext (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t *number);

Give the next predicted uid for mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_get_message (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t msgno, mu_message_t *message)

Retrieve message number msgno, message is allocated and initialized.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL or msgno is invalid.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory.

Function: int mu_mailbox_append_message (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_message_t message)

The message is appended to the mailbox mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL or message is invalid.

Function: int mu_mailbox_messages_count (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t *number);

Give the number of messages in mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_messages_recent (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t *number);

Give the number of recent messages in mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_message_unseen (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t *number);

Give the number of first unseen message in mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_expunge (mu_mailbox_t mbox)

All messages marked for deletion are removed.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_save_attributes (mu_mailbox_t mbox)
Function: int mu_mailbox_get_size (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_off_t *size)

Gives the mbox size.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_is_updated (mu_mailbox_t mbox)
Function: int mu_mailbox_scan (mu_mailbox_t mbox, size_t msgno, size_t *count);

Scan the mailbox for new messages starting at message msgno.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory.

Function: int mu_mailbox_get_stream (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_stream_t *stream)

The mailbox stream is put in stream.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is invalid or stream is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_set_stream (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_stream_t stream)

Set the stream connection to use for the mailbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox or stream is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_get_locker (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_locker_t *locker)

Get the mu_locker_t object.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_set_locker (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_locker_t locker)

Set the type of locking done by the mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_get_property (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_property_t *property)

Get the property object. The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

ENOMEM
Function: int mu_mailbox_get_url (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_url_t *url)

Gives the constructed url.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailbox_has_debug (mu_mailbox_t mbox)
Function: int mu_mailbox_get_debug (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_debug_t *debug)

Get a debug object. The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

ENOMEM
Function: int mu_mailbox_set_debug (mu_mailbox_t mbox, mu_debug_t debug)
Function: int mu_mailbox_get_observable (mu_mailbox_t mbox mbox, mu_observable_t *observable)

Get the observable object.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mbox is NULL.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory.

Function: int mu_mailbox_lock (mu_mailbox_t mbox)
Function: int mu_mailbox_unlock (mu_mailbox_t mbox)

3.1.3 Mailer

 
/* Prefix mu_mailer_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/mailer.h>

Function: int mu_mailer_create (mu_mailer_t *, const char *url)
Function: void mu_mailer_destroy (mu_mailer_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_open (mu_mailer_t, int flags)
Function: int mu_mailer_close (mu_mailer_t)
Function: int mu_mailer_send_message (mu_mailer_t mailer, mu_message_t msg, mu_address_t from, mu_address_t to);

If from is not NULL, it must contain a single fully qualified RFC2822 email address which will be used as the envelope from address. This is the address to which delivery status notifications are sent, so it never matters what it is set to until it really matters. This is equivalent to Sendmail's ‘-f’ flag.

The default for from is provided by the specific mailer.

If to is not NULL, then the message will be sent to the list of addresses that it specifies.

The default for to is to use the contents of the standard "To:", "Cc:", and "Bcc:" fields, this is equivalent to Sendmail's ‘-t’ flag.

Function: int mu_mailer_get_property (mu_mailer_t, mu_property_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_get_stream (mu_mailer_t, mu_stream_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_set_stream (mu_mailer_t, mu_stream_t)
Function: int mu_mailer_get_debug (mu_mailer_t, mu_debug_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_set_debug (mu_mailer_t, mu_debug_t)
Function: int mu_mailer_get_observable (mu_mailer_t, observable_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_get_url (mu_mailer_t, url_t *)
Function: int mu_mailer_check_from (mu_address_t from)
Function: int mu_mailer_check_to (mu_address_t to)

Some Usage Notes

Some possible use cases the API must support are:

The Sendmail Mailer

/sbin/sendmail’ isn't always Sendmail... Sometimes it's a Sendmail-compatible wrapper, so assume ‘/sbin/sendmail’ understands only a recipient list, ‘-f’ and ‘-oi’, these seem to be pretty basic. Cross fingers.

Pipe to "/sbin/sendmail -oi [-f from] [to...]", supplying ‘-f’ if there was a from, and supplying the recipient list from the to (if there is no recipient list, assume it will read the message contents for the recipients).

Caution: since the stdout and stderr of Sendmail is closed, we have no way of ever giving feedback on failure. Also, what should the return code be from mu_mailer_send_message() when Sendmail returns ‘1’? ‘1’ maps to EPERM, which is less than descriptive!

The SMTP Mailer

This mailer does not canonicalize the message. This must be done before sending the message, or it may be assumed that the MTA will do so.

It does blind out the Bcc: header before sending, though.

Caution: Mutt always puts the recipient addresses on the command line, even Bcc: ones, do we strip the Bcc: before forwarding with SMTP?

Non-RFC822 Addresses

An address that has no domain is not and RFC822 email address. What do I do with them? Should the user of the API be responsible for determining what is mean by email to "John" means? Or should the be able to configure Sendmail to decide globally what this means. If so, we can pass the address to Sendmail, but we have to decide for SMTP! So, right now these addresses are rejected. This could be changed.

3.1.4 Message

 
/* Prefix mu_message_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/message.h>

The mu_message_t object is a convenient way to manipulate messages. It encapsulates the envelope_t, the header_t and the body_t.

 
    mailbox_t
    ----------                   mu_message_t
   (message[1])        +------>+--------------------+
    ----------         |       |  mu_envelope_t     |
   (message[2])        |       |--------------------|
    ----------         |       |  mu_header_t       |
   (message[3])--------+       |--------------------|
    ----------                 |  mu_body_t         |
   (message[n])                |--------------------|
    ----------                 |  mu_attribute_t    |
                               |--------------------|
                               |  mu_stream_t       |
                               +--------------------+
Function: void mu_message_create (mu_message_t *msg, void *owner)
Function: void mu_message_destroy (mu_message_t *msg, void *owner)

The resources allocate for msg are freed.

Function: int mu_message_create_copy (mu_message_t *to, mu_message_t *from)
Function: void* mu_message_get_owner (mu_message_t msg)
Function: int mu_message_is_modified (mu_message_t msg)
Function: int mu_message_clear_modified (mu_message_t msg)
Function: int mu_message_get_mailbox (mu_message_t msg, mu_mailbox_t *mbox)
Function: int mu_message_set_mailbox (mu_message_t msg, mu_mailbox_t mbox, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_ref (mu_message_t msg)
Function: int mu_message_get_envelope (mu_message_t msg, mu_envelope_t *envelope)
Function: int mu_message_set_envelope (mu_message_t msg, mu_envelope_t envelope, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_header (mu_message_t msg, mu_header_t *header)

Retrieve msg header.

Function: int mu_message_set_header (mu_message_t msg, mu_header_t header, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_body (mu_message_t msg, mu_body_t *body)
Function: int mu_message_set_body (mu_message_t msg, mu_body_t body, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_stream (mu_message_t msg, mu_stream_t *stream)
Function: int mu_message_set_stream (mu_message_t msg, mu_stream_t stream, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_attribute (mu_message_t msg, mu_attribute_t *attribute)
Function: int mu_message_set_attribute (mu_message_t msg, mu_attribute_t attribute, void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_observable (mu_message_t msg, mu_observable_t *observable)
Function: int mu_message_is_multipart (mu_message_t msg, int *multi)

Set *multi to non-zero value if msg is multi-part.

Function: int mu_message_set_is_multipart (mu_message_t msg, int (*_is_multipart) (mu_message_t, int *), void *);
Function: int mu_message_size (mu_message_t msg, size_t *size)
Function: int mu_message_set_size (mu_message_t msg, int (*_size) (mu_message_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_lines (mu_message_t msg, size_t *size)
Function: int mu_message_set_lines (mu_message_t msg, int (*_lines) (mu_message_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_num_parts (mu_message_t msg, size_t *nparts)
Function: int mu_message_set_get_num_parts (mu_message_t msg, int (*_get_num_parts) (mu_message_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_part (mu_message_t msg, size_t part, mu_message_t *msg)
Function: int mu_message_set_get_part (mu_message_t msg, int (*_get_part) (mu_message_t, size_t, mu_message_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_uidl (mu_message_t msg, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *writen)
Function: int mu_message_set_uidl (mu_message_t msg, int (*_get_uidl) (mu_message_t, char *, size_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_get_uid (mu_message_t msg, size_t *uid)
Function: int mu_message_set_uid (mu_message_t msg, int (*_get_uid) (mu_message_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_message_create_attachment (const char *content_type, const char *encoding, const char *filename, mu_message_t *newmsg)
Function: int mu_message_save_attachment (mu_message_t msg, const char *filename, void **data)
Function: int mu_message_encapsulate (mu_message_t msg, mu_message_t *newmsg, void **data)
Function: int mu_message_unencapsulate (mu_message_t msg, mu_message_t *newmsg, void **data);
Function: int mu_message_get_attachment_name (mu_message_t msg, char *name, size_t bufsize, size_t *size);
Function: int mu_message_aget_attachment_name (mu_message_t msg, char **name);
Function: int mu_message_save_to_mailbox (mu_message_t msg, mu_ticket_t ticket, mu_debug_t debug, const char *toname);

3.1.5 Envelope

 
/* Prefix mu_envelope_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/envelope.h>
Function: int mu_envelope_create (mu_envelope_t *, void *)

Primarily for internal use.

Function: void mu_envelope_destroy (mu_envelope_t *, void *)

Primarily for internal use.

Function: void* mu_envelope_get_owner (mu_envelope_t)
Function: int mu_envelope_sender (mu_envelope_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)

Get the address that this message was reportedly received from. This would be the "mail from" argument if the message was delivered or received via SMTP, for example.

Function: int mu_envelope_set_sender (mu_envelope_t, int (*_sender) (mu_envelope_t, char *, size_t, size_t *), void *)

Primarily for internal use. The implementation of mu_envelope_t depends on the mailbox type, this allows the function which actually gets the sender to be set by the creator of an mu_envelope_t.

Function: int mu_envelope_date (mu_envelope_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)

Get the date that the message was delivered to the mailbox, in something close to ANSI ctime() format: Mon Jul 05 13:08:27 1999.

Function: int mu_envelope_set_date (mu_envelope_t, int (*_date) (mu_envelope_t, char *, size_t, size_t *), void *)

Primarily for internal use. The implementation of mu_envelope_t depends on the mailbox type, this allows the function which actually gets the date to be set by the creator of an mu_envelope_t.

3.1.6 Headers

 
/* Prefix mu_header_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/header.h>

So far we plan support for RFC822 and plan for RFC1522. With RFC1522 non-ASCII characters will be encoded.

Function: int mu_header_create (mu_header_t *hdr, const char *blurb, size_t len, void *owner)

Initialize a hdr to a supported type. If blurb is not NULL, it is parsed.

Function: void mu_header_destroy (mu_header_t *hdr, void *owner)

The resources allocated for hdr are freed.

Function: void* mu_header_get_owner (mu_header_t *hdr)
Function: int mu_header_is_modified (mu_header_t hdr)
Function: int mu_header_clear_modified (mu_header_t hdr)
Function: int mu_header_set_value (mu_header_t hdr, const char *fn, const char *fv, int n)

Some basic macros are already provided for RFC822.

MU_HEADER_UNIX_FROM

From

MU_HEADER_RETURN_PATH

Return-Path

MU_HEADER_RECEIVED

Received

MU_HEADER_DATE

Date

MU_HEADER_FROM

From

MU_HEADER_SENDER

Sender

MU_HEADER_RESENT_FROM

Resent-From

MU_HEADER_SUBJECT

Subject

MU_HEADER_SENDER

Sender

MU_HEADER_RESENT_SENDER

Resent-SENDER

MU_HEADER_TO

To

MU_HEADER_RESENT_TO

Resent-To

MU_HEADER_CC

Cc

MU_HEADER_RESENT_CC

Resent-Cc

MU_HEADER_BCC

Bcc

MU_HEADER_RESENT_BCC

Resent-Bcc

MU_HEADER_REPLY_TO

Reply-To

MU_HEADER_RESENT_REPLY_TO

Resent-Reply-To

MU_HEADER_MESSAGE_ID

Message-ID

MU_HEADER_RESENT_MESSAGE_ID

Resent-Message-ID

MU_HEADER_IN_REPLY_TO

In-Reply-To

MU_HEADER_REFERENCE

Reference

MU_HEADER_REFERENCES

References

MU_HEADER_ENCRYPTED

Encrypted

MU_HEADER_PRECEDENCE

Precedence

MU_HEADER_STATUS

Status

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_LENGTH

Content-Length

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_LANGUAGE

Content-Language

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_TRANSFER_ENCODING

Content-transfer-encoding

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_ID

Content-ID

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_TYPE

Content-Type

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_DESCRIPTION

Content-Description

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_DISPOSITION

Content-Disposition

MU_HEADER_CONTENT_MD5

Content-MD5

MU_HEADER_MIME_VERSION

MIME-Version

MU_HEADER_X_UIDL

X-UIDL

MU_HEADER_X_UID

X-UID

MU_HEADER_X_IMAPBASE

X-IMAPbase

MU_HEADER_ENV_SENDER

X-Envelope-Sender

MU_HEADER_ENV_DATE

X-Envelope-Date

MU_HEADER_FCC

Fcc

MU_HEADER_DELIVERY_DATE

Delivery-date

MU_HEADER_ENVELOPE_TO

Envelope-to

Function: int mu_header_get_value (mu_header_t hdr, const char *fn, char *fv, size_t len, size_t *n)

Value of field-name fn is returned in buffer fv of size len. The number of bytes written is put in n.

Function: int mu_header_aget_value (mu_header_t hdr, const char *fn, char **fv)

The value is allocated.

Function: int mu_header_get_address (mu_header_t hdr, const char *buf, address_t *addr)
Function: int mu_header_get_stream (mu_header_t hdr, stream_t *stream)
Function: int mu_header_set_stream (mu_header_t hdr, stream_t stream, void *)
Function: int mu_header_get_field_count (mu_header_t hdr, size_t *count)
Function: int mu_header_get_field_value (mu_header_t hdr, size_t index, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_header_get_field_name (mu_header_t hdr, size_t index, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_header_aget_field_value (mu_header_t hdr, size_t index, char **)
Function: int mu_header_aget_field_name (mu_header_t hdr, size_t index, char **)
Function: int mu_header_get_value_unfold (mu_header_t hdr, const char *name, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)
Function: int mu_header_aget_value_unfold (mu_header_t hdr, const char *name, char **value)
Function: int mu_header_get_field_value_unfold (mu_header_t hdr, size_t num, char *buf, size_t buflen, size_t *nwritten)
Function: int mu_header_aget_field_value_unfold (mu_header_t hdr, size_t num, char **value);
Function: int mu_header_size (mu_header_t hdr, size_t *);
Function: int mu_header_lines (mu_header_t hdr, size_t *);
Function: int mu_header_set_set_value (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_set_value) (mu_header_t, const char *, const char *, int), void *);
Function: int mu_header_set_get_value (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_get_value) (mu_header_t, const char *, char *, size_t, size_t *), void *);
Function: int mu_header_set_get_fvalue (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_get_value) (mu_header_t, const char *, char *, size_t, size_t *), void *);
Function: int mu_header_set_size (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_size) (mu_header_t, size_t *), void *);
Function: int mu_header_set_lines (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_lines) (mu_header_t, size_t *), void *);
Function: int mu_header_set_fill (mu_header_t hdr, int (*_fill) (mu_header_t, char *, size_t, mu_off_t, size_t *), void *owner);

3.1.7 Body

 
/* Prefix mu_body_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/body.h>
Function: int mu_body_create (mu_body_t *body, void *owner)

Initialize an object body.

Function: void mu_body_destroy (mu_body_t *body)

The resources allocated are release.

Function: void* mu_body_get_owner (mu_body_t body)
Function: int mu_body_is_modified (mu_body_t body)
Function: int mu_body_clear_modified (mu_body_t body)
Function: int mu_body_get_stream (mu_body_t body, stream_t *stream)
Function: int mu_body_set_stream (mu_body_t body, stream_t stream, void *owner)
Function: int mu_body_get_filename (mu_body_t body, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *writen)
Function: int mu_body_size (mu_body_t body, size_t *size)
Function: int mu_body_set_size (mu_body_t body, int (*_size) (mu_body_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_body_lines (mu_body_t body, size_t *lines)
Function: int mu_body_set_lines (mu_body_t body, int (*_lines) (mu_body_t, size_t *), void *owner)

3.1.8 Attribute

 
/* Prefix mu_attribute_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/attribute.h>
Function: int mu_attribute_create (mu_attribute_t *attr, void *)
Function: void mu_attribute_destroy (mu_attribute_t *attr, void *)
Function: void* mu_attribute_get_owner (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_modified (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_clear_modified (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_modified (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_userflag (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_seen (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_answered (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_flagged (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_deleted (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_draft (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_recent (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_read (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_userflag (mu_attribute_t attr, int)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_seen (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_answered (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_flagged (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_deleted (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_draft (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_recent (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_read (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_userflag (mu_attribute_t attr, int)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_seen (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_answered (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_flagged (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_deleted (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_draft (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_recent (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_read (mu_attribute_t attr)
Function: int mu_attribute_get_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int *)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int)
Function: int mu_attribute_unset_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_set_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int (*_set_flags) (mu_attribute_t, int), void *)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_unset_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int (*_unset_flags) (mu_attribute_t, int), void *)
Function: int mu_attribute_set_get_flags (mu_attribute_t attr, int (*_get_flags) (mu_attribute_t, int *), void *)
Function: int mu_attribute_is_equal (mu_attribute_t attr1, mu_attribute_t attr2)
Function: int mu_attribute_copy (mu_attribute_t dst, mu_attribute_t src)
Function: int mu_attribute_to_string (mu_attribute_t attr, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *writen)
Function: int string_to_flags (const char *buf, int *)

3.1.9 Stream

 
#include <mailutils/stream.h>

These generic flags are interpreted as appropriate to the specific streams.

MU_STREAM_READ

The stream is open read only.

MU_STREAM_WRITE

The stream is open write only.

MU_STREAM_RDWR

The stream is open read and write.

MU_STREAM_APPEND

The stream is open in append mode for writing.

MU_STREAM_CREAT

The stream open will create the underlying resource (such as a file) if it doesn't exist already.

MU_STREAM_NONBLOCK

The stream is set non blocking.

MU_STREAM_NO_CHECK

Stream is destroyed without checking for the owner.

MU_STREAM_SEEKABLE
MU_STREAM_NO_CLOSE

Stream doesn't close it's underlying resource when it is closed or destroyed.

MU_STREAM_ALLOW_LINKS
Function: int mu_file_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *filename, int flags)
Function: int mu_tcp_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *host, int port, int flags)
Function: int mu_mapfile_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *filename, int flags)
Function: int mu_memory_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *filename, int flags)
Function: int mu_encoder_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, mu_stream_t iostream, const char *encoding)
Function: int mu_decoder_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, mu_stream_t iostream, const char *encoding)
Function: int mu_stdio_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, FILE *stdio, int flags)

If MU_STREAM_NO_CLOSE is specified, fclose() will not be called on stdio when the stream is closed.

Function: int mu_prog_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *progname, int flags)
Function: int mu_filter_prog_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, const char *progname, mu_stream_t input)
Function: void mu_stream_destroy (mu_stream_t *stream, void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_open (mu_stream_t stream)
Function: int mu_stream_close (mu_stream_t stream)
Function: int mu_stream_is_seekable (mu_stream_t stream)
Function: int mu_stream_get_fd (mu_stream_t stream, int *fd)
Function: int mu_stream_get_fd2 (mu_stream_t stream, int *fd1, int *fd2)
Function: int mu_stream_read (mu_stream_t stream, char *buffer, size_t buflen, mu_off_t offset, size_t *writen)
Function: int mu_stream_readline (mu_stream_t stream, char *buffer, size_t buflen, mu_off_t offset, size_t *writen)
Function: int mu_stream_size (mu_stream_t stream, mu_off_t *size)
Function: n int mu_stream_truncate (mu_stream_t stream, mu_off_t size)
Function: int mu_stream_write (mu_stream_t stream, const char *buffer, size_t buflen, mu_off_t offset, size_t *writen)
Function: int mu_stream_setbufsiz (mu_stream_t stream, size_t size)
Function: int mu_stream_flush (mu_stream_t stream)
Function: int mu_stream_create (mu_stream_t *stream, int flags, void *owner)

Used to implement a new kind of stream.

Function: void* mu_stream_get_owner (mu_stream_t stream)
Function: void mu_stream_set_owner (mu_stream_t stream, void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_get_flags (mu_stream_t stream, int *flags)
Function: int mu_stream_set_flags (mu_stream_t stream, int flags)
Function: int mu_stream_get_property (mu_stream_t stream, property_t *)
Function: int mu_stream_set_property (mu_stream_t stream, property_t, void *)
Function: int mu_stream_get_state (mu_stream_t stream, int *state)
MU_STREAM_STATE_OPEN

Last action was mu_stream_open.

MU_STREAM_STATE_READ

Last action was mu_stream_read or mu_stream_readline.

MU_STREAM_STATE_WRITE

Last action was mu_stream_write.

MU_STREAM_STATE_CLOSE

Last action was mu_stream_close.

Function: int mu_stream_set_destroy (mu_stream_t stream, void (*_destroy) (mu_stream_t), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_open (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_open) (mu_stream_t), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_close (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_close) (mu_stream_t), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_fd (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_get_fd) (mu_stream_t, int *, int *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_read (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_read) (mu_stream_t, char *, size_t, mu_off_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_readline (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_readline) (mu_stream_t, char *, size_t, mu_off_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_size (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_size) (mu_stream_t, mu_off_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_truncate (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_truncate) (mu_stream_t, mu_off_t), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_write (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_write) (mu_stream_t, const char *, size_t, mu_off_t, size_t *), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_flush (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_flush) (mu_stream_t), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_set_strerror (mu_stream_t stream, int (*_fp) (mu_stream_t, char **), void *owner)
Function: int mu_stream_sequential_readline (mu_stream_ts stream, char *buf, size_t size, size_t *nbytes)
Function: int mu_stream_sequential_write (mu_stream_t stream, char *buf, size_t size)
Function: int mu_stream_seek (mu_stream_t stream, mu_off_t off, int whence)
Function: int mu_stream_strerror (mu_stream_t stream, char **p)

An example using mu_tcp_stream_create() to make a simple web client:

 
/* This is an example program to illustrate the use of stream functions.
   It connects to a remote HTTP server and prints the contents of its
   index page */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/time.h>

#include <mailutils/mailutils.h>

char wbuf[1024];
char rbuf[1024];

size_t io_timeout = 3;
size_t io_attempts = 3;

int
http_stream_wait (mu_stream_t stream, int flags, size_t *attempt)
{
  int rc;
  int oflags = flags;
  struct timeval tv;

  while (*attempt < io_attempts)
    {
      tv.tv_sec = io_timeout;
      tv.tv_usec = 0;
      rc = mu_stream_wait (stream, &oflags, &tv);
      switch (rc) {
      case 0:
	if (flags & oflags)
	  return 0;
	/* FALLTHROUGH */
      case EAGAIN:
      case EINPROGRESS:
	++*attempt;
	continue;
	
      default:
	return rc;
      }
    }
  return ETIMEDOUT;
}

int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  int ret, off = 0;
  mu_stream_t stream;
  size_t nb, size;
  size_t attempt;
  char *url = "www.gnu.org";

  if (argc > 3)
    {
      fprintf (stderr, "usage: %s [hostname [url]]\n", argv[0]);
      exit (1);
    }
  
  if (argc > 1)
    url = argv[1];
  
  snprintf (wbuf, sizeof wbuf, "GET %s HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n",
	    argc == 3 ? argv[2] : "/");

  ret = mu_tcp_stream_create (&stream, url, 80, MU_STREAM_NONBLOCK);
  if (ret != 0)
    {
      mu_error ("mu_tcp_stream_create: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  for (attempt = 0; (ret = mu_stream_open (stream)); )
    {
      if ((ret == EAGAIN || ret == EINPROGRESS) && attempt < io_attempts)
	{
	  ret = http_stream_wait(stream, MU_STREAM_READY_WR, &attempt);
	  if (ret == 0)
	    continue;
	}
      mu_error ("mu_stream_open: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  for (attempt = 0, size = strlen (wbuf); size > 0; )
    {
      ret = mu_stream_write (stream, wbuf + off, strlen (wbuf), 0, &nb);
      if (ret == 0)
	{
	  if (nb == 0)
	    {
	      mu_error("mu_stream_write: wrote 0 bytes");
	      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
	    }
	  off += nb;
	  size -= nb;
	}
      else if (ret == EAGAIN)
        {
	  if (attempt < io_attempts)
	    {
	      ret = http_stream_wait (stream, MU_STREAM_READY_WR, &attempt);
	      if (ret)
		{
		  mu_error ("http_wait failed: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
		  return -1;
		}
	      continue;
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      mu_error ("mu_stream_write timed out");
	      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
	    }
	}
      else
	{
	  mu_error ("mu_stream_write: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
	  exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
	}
    }

  attempt = 0;
  for (;;)
    {
      ret = mu_stream_read (stream, rbuf, sizeof (rbuf), 0, &nb);
      if (ret == 0)
	{
	  if (nb == 0)
	    break;
	  write (1, rbuf, nb);
	}
      else if (ret == EAGAIN)
	{
	  if (attempt < io_attempts)
	    {
	      ret = http_stream_wait (stream, MU_STREAM_READY_RD, &attempt);
	      if (ret)
		{
		  mu_error ("http_stream_wait failed: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
		  exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
		}
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      mu_error ("mu_stream_read: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
	      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
	    }
	}
    }

  ret = mu_stream_close (stream);
  if (ret != 0)
    {
      mu_error ("mu_stream_close: %s", mu_strerror (ret));
      exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
    }

  mu_stream_destroy (&stream, NULL);
  exit (EXIT_SUCCESS);
}

3.1.10 Iterator

 
/* Prefix mu_iterator_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/iterator.h>
Function: int mu_iterator_create (mu_iterator_t *iterator, void *obj)
Function: int mu_iterator_dup (mu_iterator_t *iterator, mu_iterator_t orig)
Function: void mu_iterator_destroy (mu_iterator_t *)
Function: int mu_iterator_first (mu_iterator_t)
Function: int mu_iterator_next (mu_iterator_t)
Function: int mu_iterator_current (mu_iterator_t, void **item)
Function: int mu_iterator_is_done (mu_iterator_t)
Function: int mu_iterator_attach (mu_iterator_t *root, mu_iterator_t iterator)
Function: int mu_iterator_detach (mu_iterator_t *root, mu_iterator_t iterator)
Function: void mu_iterator_advance (mu_iterator_t iterator, void *item)
Function: int mu_iterator_set_first (mu_iterator_t iterator, int (*first) (void *))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_next (mu_iterator_t iterator, int (*next) (void *))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_getitem (mu_iterator_t iterator, int (*getitem) (void *, void **))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_finished_p (mu_iterator_t iterator, int (*finished_p) (void *))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_dup (mu_iterator_t itr, int (*dup) (void **ptr, void *data))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_destroy (mu_iterator_t itr, int (*destroy) (mu_iterator_t itr, void *data))
Function: int mu_iterator_set_curitem_p (mu_iterator_t itr, int (*curitem_p) (void *, void *))

3.1.11 Authenticator

 
/* Prefixes mu_authority_, mu_ticket_, and mu_wicket_ are reserved. */
#include <mailutils/auth.h>

There are many ways to authenticate to a server. To be flexible the authentication process is provided by three objects mu_authority_t, mu_ticket_t, and mu_wicket_t. The mu_authority_t can implement different protocol like APOP, MD5-AUTH, One Time Passwd, etc. By default if a mailbox does not understand or know how to authenticate it falls back to user/passwd authentication. The mu_ticket_t is a way for Mailboxes and Mailers provide a way to authenticate when the URL does not contain enough information. The default action is to call the function mu_authority_authenticate() which will get the user and passwd if not set, this function can be overridden by a custom method.

Function: int mu_ticket_create (mu_ticket_t *, void *owner)
Function: void mu_ticket_destroy (mu_ticket_t *, void *owner)
Function: int mu_ticket_set_destroy (mu_ticket_t, void (*) (mu_ticket_t), void *owner)
Function: void* mu_ticket_get_owner (mu_ticket_t)
Function: int mu_ticket_set_pop (mu_ticket_t, int (*_pop) (mu_ticket_t, url_t, const char *, char **), void *)
Function: int mu_ticket_pop (mu_ticket_t, url_t, const char *, char **)
Function: int mu_ticket_set_data (mu_ticket_t, void *, void *owner)
Function: int mu_ticket_get_data (mu_ticket_t, void **)

Function: int mu_authority_create (mu_authority_t *, mu_ticket_t, void *)
Function: void mu_authority_destroy (mu_authority_t *, void *)
Function: void* mu_authority_get_owner (mu_authority_t)
Function: int mu_authority_set_ticket (mu_authority_t, mu_ticket_t)
Function: int mu_authority_get_ticket (mu_authority_t, mu_ticket_t *)
Function: int mu_authority_authenticate (mu_authority_t)
Function: int mu_authority_set_authenticate (mu_authority_t, int (*_authenticate) (mu_authority_t), void *)
Function: int mu_authority_create_null (mu_authority_t *authority, void *owner)

Function: int mu_wicket_create (mu_wicket_t *, const char *)
Function: void mu_wicket_destroy (mu_wicket_t *)
Function: int mu_wicket_set_filename (mu_wicket_t, const char *)
Function: int mu_wicket_get_filename (mu_wicket_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_wicket_set_ticket (mu_wicket_t, int (*) (mu_wicket_t, const char *, const char *, mu_ticket_t *))
Function: int mu_wicket_get_ticket (mu_wicket_t, mu_ticket_t *, const char *, const char *)

A simple example of an authenticate function:

 
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <mailutils/auth.h>

int
my_authenticate (auth_t auth, char **user, char **passwd)
{
  char u[128] = "";
  char p[128] = "";

  /* prompt the user name */
  printf ("User: ");
  fflush (stdout);
  fgets (u, sizeof (u), stdin);
  u[strlen (u) - 1] = '\0'; /* nuke the trailing NL */

  /* prompt the passwd */
  printf ("Passwd: "); fflush (stdout);
  echo_off ();
  fgets (p, sizeof(p), stdin);
  echo_on ();
  p[strlen (p) - 1] = '\0';

  /* duplicate */
  *user = strdup (u);
  *passwd = strdup (p);
  return 0;
}

3.1.12 Address

 
/* Prefix address_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/address.h>

The Internet address format is defined in RFC 822. RFC 822 has been updated, and is now superceeded by RFC 2822, which makes some corrections and clarifications. References to RFC 822 here apply equally to RFC 2822.

The RFC 822 format is more flexible than many people realize, here is a quick summary of the syntax this parser implements, see RFC 822 for the details. ‘[]’ pairs mean "optional", ‘/’ means "one or the other", and double-quoted characters are literals.

 
addr-spec    = local-part "@" domain
mailbox      = addr-spec ["(" display-name ")"] /
               [display-name] "<" [route] addr-spec ">"
mailbox-list = mailbox ["," mailbox-list]
group        = display-name ":" [mailbox-list] ";"
address      = mailbox / group / unix-mbox
address-list = address ["," address-list]

Unix-mbox is a non-standard extension meant to deal with the common practice of using user names as addresses in mail utilities. It allows addresses such as "root" to be parsed correctly. These are not valid internet email addresses, they must be qualified before use.

Several address functions have a set of common arguments with consistent semantics, these are described here to avoid repetition.

Since an address-list may contain multiple addresses, they are accessed by a one-based index number, no. The index is one-based because pop, imap, and other message stores commonly use one-based counts to access messages and attributes of messages.

If len is greater than 0 it is the length of the buffer buf, and as much of the component as possible will be copied into the buffer. The buffer will be NULL terminated.

The size of a particular component may be queried by providing 0 for the len of the buffer, in which case the buffer is optional. In this case, if n is provided *n is assigned the length of the component string.

Data Type: mu_address_t

The mu_address_t object is used to hold information about a parsed RFC822 address list, and is an opaque data structure to the user. Functions are provided to retrieve information about an address in the address list.

Function: int mu_address_create (mu_address_t *addr, const char *string)

This function allocates and initializes addr by parsing the RFC822 address-list string.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory to allocate resources.

ENOENT

Invalid RFC822 syntax, parsing failed.

Function: int mu_address_createv (mu_address_t *addr, const char *sv, size_t len)

This function allocates and initializes addr by parsing the array of pointers to RFC822 address-lists in sv. If len is -1, then sv must be NULL terminated in the fashion of argv, otherwise len is the length of the array.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory to allocate resources.

ENOENT

Invalid RFC822 syntax, parsing failed.

Function: void mu_address_destroy (mu_address_t *addr)

The addr is destroyed.

Function: int mu_address_get_nth (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, mu_address_t *ret)
Function: int mu_address_get_email (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char* buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the noth email address component of the address list. This address is the plain email address, correctly quoted, suitable for using in an smtp dialog, for example, or as the address part of a contact book entry.

Note that the entry may be valid, but be a group name. In this case success is returned, but the length of the address is 0.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_get_local_part (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the local-part of an email addr-spec extracted while parsing the noth email address.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_get_domain (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the domain of an email addr-spec extracted while parsing the noth email address. This will be 0 length for a unix-mbox.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_get_personal (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the display-name describing the noth email address. This display-name is optional, so may not be present. If it is not present, but there is an RFC822 comment after the address, that comment will be returned as the personal phrase, as this is a common usage of the comment even though it is not defined in the internet mail standard.

A group is a kind of a special case. It has a display-name, followed by an optional mailbox-list. The display-name will be allocated an address all it's own, but all the other elements (local-part, domain, etc.) will be zero-length. So "a group: ;" is valid, will have a count of 1, but mu_address_get_email(), and all the rest, will return zero-length output.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_get_comments (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the comments extracted while parsing the noth email address. These comments have no defined meaning, and are not currently collected.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_get_route (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Accesses the route of an email addr-spec extracted while parsing the noth email address. This is a rarely used RFC822 address syntax, but is legal in SMTP as well. The entire route is returned as a string, those wishing to parse it should look at ‘mailutils/parse822.h’.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_aget_email (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char **bufp)

As above, but mallocs the email address, if present, and write a pointer to it into bufp. bufp will be NULL if there is no email address to return.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_aget_local_part (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char **buf)
Function: int mu_address_aget_domain (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char **buf)
Function: int mu_address_aget_personal (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, char **buf)
Function: int mu_address_is_group (mu_address_t addr, size_t no, int *yes)

Sets *yes to 1 if this address is just the name of a group, 0 otherwise. This is faster than checking if the address has a non-zero length personal, and a zero-length local_part and domain.

yes can be NULL, though that doesn't serve much purpose other than determining that no refers to an address.

Currently, there is no way to determine the end of the group.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOENT

The index no is outside of the range of available addresses.

Function: int mu_address_to_string (mu_address_t *addr, char *buf, size_t len, size_t *n)

Returns the entire address list as a single RFC822 formatted address list.

The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

Invalid usage, usually a required argument was NULL.

ENOMEM

Not enough memory to allocate resources.

Function: int mu_address_get_count (mu_address_t addr, size_t *count)

Returns a count of the addresses in the address list.

If addr is NULL, the count is 0. If count is not NULL, the count will be written to *count.

The return value is 0.

Function: int mu_address_get_group_count (mu_address_t addr, size_t *)
Function: int mu_address_get_email_count (mu_address_t addr, size_t *)
Function: int mu_address_get_unix_mailbox_count (mu_address_t addr, size_t *)
Function: int mu_address_contains_email (mu_address_t addr, const char *email)
Function: int mu_address_union (mu_address_t *a, mu_address_t b)
Function: size_t mu_address_format_string (mu_address_t addr, char *buf, size_t buflen)

Example

 
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <errno.h>

#include <mailutils/address.h>
#include <mailutils/errno.h>
#include <mailutils/kwd.h>
#include <mailutils/mutil.h>

#define EPARSE MU_ERR_NOENT

struct mu_address hint;
int hflags;

static int
parse (const char *str)
{
  size_t no = 0;
  size_t pcount = 0;
  int status;
  const char *buf;
  mu_address_t address = NULL;

  status = mu_address_create_hint (&address, str, &hint, hflags);
  mu_address_get_count (address, &pcount);

  if (status)
    {
      printf ("%s=> error %s\n\n", str, mu_errname (status));
      return 0;
    }
  else
    {
      printf ("%s=> pcount %lu\n", str, (unsigned long) pcount);
    }

  for (no = 1; no <= pcount; no++)
    {
      int isgroup;

      mu_address_is_group (address, no, &isgroup);
      printf ("%lu ", (unsigned long) no);

      if (isgroup)
        {
          mu_address_sget_personal (address, no, &buf);
          printf ("group <%s>\n", buf);
        }
      else
        {
          mu_address_sget_email (address, no, &buf);
          printf ("email <%s>\n", buf);
        }

      if (mu_address_sget_personal (address, no, &buf) == 0 && buf && !isgroup)
        printf ("   personal <%s>\n", buf);

      if (mu_address_sget_comments (address, no, &buf) == 0 && buf)
        printf ("   comments <%s>\n", buf);

      if (mu_address_sget_local_part (address, no, &buf) == 0 && buf)
        {
          printf ("   local-part <%s>", buf);

          if (mu_address_sget_domain (address, no, &buf) == 0 && buf)
            printf (" domain <%s>", buf);

          printf ("\n");
        }

      if (mu_address_sget_route (address, no, &buf) == 0 && buf)
        printf ("   route <%s>\n", buf);
    }
  mu_address_destroy (&address);

  printf ("\n");
  return 0;
}

struct mu_kwd hintnames[] = {
  { "comments", MU_ADDR_HINT_COMMENTS },
  { "personal", MU_ADDR_HINT_PERSONAL },
  { "email", MU_ADDR_HINT_EMAIL },
  { "local", MU_ADDR_HINT_LOCAL },
  { "domain", MU_ADDR_HINT_DOMAIN },
  { "route", MU_ADDR_HINT_ROUTE },
  { NULL }
};

static char **
addr_fieldptr_by_mask (mu_address_t addr, int mask)
{
  switch (mask)						
    {
    case MU_ADDR_HINT_ADDR:
      return &addr->addr;
	  
    case MU_ADDR_HINT_COMMENTS:				
      return &addr->comments;					
	  
    case MU_ADDR_HINT_PERSONAL:				
      return &addr->personal;					

    case MU_ADDR_HINT_EMAIL:
      return &addr->email;

    case MU_ADDR_HINT_LOCAL:
      return &addr->local_part;
      
    case MU_ADDR_HINT_DOMAIN:				
      return &addr->domain;					

    case MU_ADDR_HINT_ROUTE:
      return &addr->route;
    }
  return NULL;
}							

void
sethint (char *str)
{
  int mask;
  char *p = strchr (str, '=');

  if (!p)
    {
      printf ("%s=> bad assignment\n\n", str);
      return;
    }
  *p++ = 0;
  if (mu_kwd_xlat_name (hintnames, str, &mask) == 0)
    {
      char **fptr = addr_fieldptr_by_mask (&hint, mask);

      if (*p == 0)
	hflags &= ~mask;
      else
	{
	  *fptr = strdup (p);
	  hflags |= mask;
	}
    }
  else
    printf ("%s=> unknown hint name\n\n", str);
}
	
static int
parseinput (void)
{
  char buf[BUFSIZ];

  while (fgets (buf, sizeof (buf), stdin) != 0)
    {
      buf[strlen (buf) - 1] = 0;
      if (buf[0] == '\\')
	sethint (buf + 1);
      else
	parse (buf);
    }

  return 0;
}

int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
  int i;
  
  hint.domain = "localhost";
  hflags = MU_ADDR_HINT_DOMAIN;
  
  if (argc == 1)
    return parseinput ();
  
  for (i = 1; i < argc; i++)
    {
      if (strcmp (argv[i], "-") == 0)
	parseinput ();
      else if (strncmp (argv[i], "-v", 2) == 0)
	sethint (argv[i] + 2);
      else
	parse (argv[i]);
    }

  return 0;
}

3.1.13 Locker

 
/* Prefix mu_locker_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/locker.h>
Function: int mu_locker_set_default_flags (int flags, enum mu_locker_set_mode mode)
Function: void mu_locker_set_default_retry_timeout (time_t to)
Function: void mu_locker_set_default_retry_count (size_t n)
Function: void mu_locker_set_default_expire_timeout (time_t t)
Function: void mu_locker_set_default_external_program (char *path)

A flags of 0 means that the default will be used.

Function: int mu_locker_create (mu_locker_t *, const char *filename, int flags)
Function: void mu_locker_destroy (mu_locker_t *)

Time is measured in seconds.

Function: int mu_locker_set_flags (mu_locker_t, int)
Function: int mu_locker_set_expire_time (mu_locker_t, int)
Function: int mu_locker_set_retries (mu_locker_t, int)
Function: int mu_locker_set_retry_sleep (mu_locker_t, int)
Function: int mu_locker_set_external (mu_locker_t, const char *program)
Function: int mu_locker_get_flags (mu_locker_t, int *)
Function: int mu_locker_get_expire_time (mu_locker_t, int*)
Function: int mu_locker_get_retries (mu_locker_t, int *)
Function: int mu_locker_get_retry_sleep (mu_locker_t, int *)
Function: int mu_locker_get_external (mu_locker_t, char **)
Function: int mu_locker_lock (mu_locker_t)
Function: int mu_locker_touchlock (mu_locker_t)
Function: int mu_locker_unlock (mu_locker_t)
Function: int mu_locker_remove_lock (mu_locker_t)

3.1.14 URL

A mailbox or a mailer can be described in a URL, the string will contain the necessary information to initialize mailbox_t, or mailer_t properly.

POP3

The POP URL scheme contains a POP server, optional port number and the authentication mechanism. The general form is

 
<pop://[user[;AUTH=auth]@]host[:port]>
 or
<pop://[user[:passwd]@]host[:port]>

If :port is omitted the default value is 110. Different forms of authentication can be specified with ;AUTH=type. The special string ;AUTH=* indicates that the client will use a default scheme base on the capability of the server.

 
<pop://obelix@gaulois.org>
<pop://asterix;AUTH=*@france.com>
<pop://falbala;AUTH=+APOP@france.com>
<pop://obelix;AUTH=+APOP@village.gaulois.org:2000>
<pop://obelix:menhir@village.gaulois.org:2000>

For more complete information see RFC 2368.

POP3S (POP3 Over SSL)

The POP3S URL scheme contains a POP server over SSL, optional port number and the authentication mechanism. The general form is

 
<pops://[user[;AUTH=auth]@]host[:port]>
 or
<pops://[user[:passwd]@]host[:port]>

If :port is omitted the default value is 995.

IMAP

The IMAP URL scheme contains an IMAP server, optional port number and the authentication mechanism. The general form is

 
<imap://[user[;AUTH=type]]@host[:port][/mailbox]>
 or
<imap://[user[:passwd]]@host[:port][/mailbox]>

If :port is omitted the default value is 143. Different forms of authentication can be specified with ;AUTH=type. The special string ;AUTH=* indicates that the client will use a default scheme base on the capability of the server.

 
<imap://obelix@imap.gaulois.org>
<imap://asterix;AUTH=*@imap.france.com>
<imap://asterix:potion@imap.france.com>

For more complete information see RFC 2192.

IMAPS (IMAP Over SSL)

The IMAPS URL scheme contains an IMAP server over SSL, optional port number and the authentication mechanism. The general form is

 
<imaps://[user[;AUTH=type]]@host[:port][/mailbox]>
 or
<imaps://[user[:passwd]]@host[:port][/mailbox]>

If :port is omitted the default value is 993.

File

Local folder should be handle by this URL. It is preferable to let the mailbox recognize the type of mailbox and take the appropriate action.

 
<file://path>
<file://var/mail/user>
<file://home/obelix/Mail>

For MMDF, MH local mailboxes URLs are provided, but it is preferable to use <file://path> and let the library figure out which one.

 
<mmdf://path>
<mh://path>

Mailto

After setting a mailer, <mailto:> is used to tell the mailer where and to whom the message is for.

 
<mailto://hostname>

Mailto can be used to generate short messages, for example to subscribe to mailing lists.

 
<mailto://bug-mailutils@gnu.org?body=subscribe>
<mailto://bug-mailutils@gnu.org?Subject=hello&body=subscribe>

For more complete information see RFC 2368.

URL Functions

Helper functions are provided to retrieve and set the URL fields.

Function: int mu_url_create (mu_url_t *url, const char *name)

Create the url data structure, but do not parse it.

Function: void mu_url_destroy (mu_url_t *url)

Destroy the url and free its resources.

Function: int mu_url_parse (mu_url_t)

Parses the url, after calling this the get functions can be called.

The syntax, condensed from RFC 1738, and extended with the ;auth= of RFC 2384 (for POP) and RFC 2192 (for IMAP) is:

 
url =
    scheme ":" [ "//"

    [ user [ ( ":" password ) | ( ";auth=" auth ) ] "@" ]

    host [ ":" port ]

    [ ( "/" urlpath ) | ( "?" query ) ] ]

This is a generalized URL syntax, and may not be exactly appropriate for any particular scheme.

Function: int mu_url_get_scheme (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_user (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_passwd (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_auth (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_host (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_port (const mu_url_t, long *)
Function: int mu_url_get_path (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: int mu_url_get_query (const mu_url_t, char *, size_t, size_t *)
Function: const char* mu_url_to_string (const mu_url_t)
Function: int mu_url_is_scheme (mu_url_t, const char *scheme)
Function: int mu_url_is_same_scheme (mu_url_t, mu_url_t)
Function: int mu_url_is_same_user (mu_url_t, mu_url_t)
Function: int mu_url_is_same_path (mu_url_t, mu_url_t)
Function: int mu_url_is_same_host (mu_url_t, mu_url_t)
Function: int mu_url_is_same_port (mu_url_t, mu_url_t)
Function: char * mu_url_decode (const char *string)

Decodes an RFC 1738 encoded string, returning the decoded string in allocated memory. If the string is not encoded, this degenerates to a strdup().

Function: int mu_url_is_ticket (mu_url_t ticket, mu_url_t url)

Example

 
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <mailutils/error.h>
#include <mailutils/errno.h>
#include <mailutils/url.h>
#include <mailutils/secret.h>

#define CAT2(a,b) a ## b

#define GET_AND_PRINT(field,u,buf,status) 		                \
      status = CAT2(mu_url_sget_,field) (u, &buf);	                \
      if (status == MU_ERR_NOENT)			                \
	buf = "";					                \
      else if (status)					                \
	{						                \
	  mu_error ("cannot get %s: %s", #field, mu_strerror (status));	\
	  exit (1);					                \
        }                                                               \
      printf ("\t" #field " <%s>\n", buf)

static void
print_fvpairs (mu_url_t url)
{
  size_t fvc, i;
  char **fvp;
  int rc = mu_url_sget_fvpairs (url, &fvc, &fvp);
  if (rc)
    {
      mu_error ("cannot get F/V pairs: %s", mu_strerror (rc));
      exit (1);
    }
  if (fvc == 0)
    return;
  for (i = 0; i < fvc; i++)
    printf ("\tparam[%lu] <%s>\n", (unsigned long) i, fvp[i]);
}

static void
print_query (mu_url_t url)
{
  size_t qargc, i;
  char **qargv;
  int rc = mu_url_sget_query (url, &qargc, &qargv);
  if (rc)
    {
      mu_error ("cannot get query: %s", mu_strerror (rc));
      exit (1);
    }
  if (qargc == 0)
    return;
  for (i = 0; i < qargc; i++)
    printf ("\tquery[%lu] <%s>\n", (unsigned long) i, qargv[i]);
}

int
main ()
{
  char str[1024];
  long port = 0;
  mu_url_t u = NULL;

  while (fgets (str, sizeof (str), stdin) != NULL)
    {
      int rc;
      const char *buf;
      mu_secret_t secret;
      
      str[strlen (str) - 1] = '\0';     /* chop newline */
      if (strspn (str, " \t") == strlen (str))
        continue;               /* skip empty lines */
      if ((rc = mu_url_create (&u, str)) != 0)
        {
          fprintf (stderr, "mu_url_create %s ERROR: [%d] %s",
                   str, rc, mu_strerror (rc));
          exit (1);
        }
      if ((rc = mu_url_parse (u)) != 0)
        {
          printf ("%s => FAILED: [%d] %s\n",
                  str, rc, mu_strerror (rc));
          continue;
        }
      printf ("%s => SUCCESS\n", str);

      GET_AND_PRINT (scheme, u, buf, rc);
      GET_AND_PRINT (user, u, buf, rc);

      rc = mu_url_get_secret (u, &secret);
      if (rc == MU_ERR_NOENT)
	printf ("\tpasswd <>\n");
      else if (rc)
	{
	  mu_error ("cannot get %s: %s", "passwd", mu_strerror (rc));
	  exit (1);
        }
      else
	{
	  printf ("\tpasswd <%s>\n", mu_secret_password (secret));
	  mu_secret_password_unref (secret);
	}
      
      GET_AND_PRINT (auth, u, buf, rc);
      GET_AND_PRINT (host, u, buf, rc);

      rc = mu_url_get_port (u, &port);
      if (rc)					
	{						
	  mu_error ("cannot get %s: %s", "port", mu_strerror (rc));	
	  exit (1);					
        }                                               
      printf ("\tport %ld\n", port);
      
      GET_AND_PRINT (path, u, buf, rc);
      print_fvpairs (u);
      print_query (u); 

      mu_url_destroy (&u);

    }
  return 0;
}

3.1.15 Parse822

 
/* Prefix mu_parse822_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/parse822.h>

Function: int mu_parse822_is_char (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_digit (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_ctl (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_space (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_htab (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_lwsp_char (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_special (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_atom_char (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_q_text (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_d_text (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_is_smtp_q (char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_skip_crlf (const char **p, const char *e)
Function: int mu_parse822_skip_lwsp_char (const char **p, const char *e)
Function: int mu_parse822_skip_lwsp (const char **p, const char *e)
Function: int mu_parse822_skip_comments (const char **p, const char *e)
Function: int mu_parse822_skip_nl (const char **p, const char *e)
Function: int mu_parse822_digits (const char **p, const char *e, int min, int max, int *digits)
Function: int mu_parse822_special (const char **p, const char *e, char c)
Function: int mu_parse822_comment (const char **p, const char *e, char **comment)
Function: int mu_parse822_atom (const char **p, const char *e, char **atom)
Function: int mu_parse822_quoted_pair (const char **p, const char *e, char **qpair)
Function: int mu_parse822_quoted_string (const char **p, const char *e, char **qstr)
Function: int mu_parse822_word (const char **p, const char *e, char **word)
Function: int mu_parse822_phrase (const char **p, const char *e, char **phrase)
Function: int mu_parse822_d_text (const char **p, const char *e, char **dtext)
Function: int mu_parse822_address_list (mu_address_t *a, const char *s)
Function: int mu_parse822_mail_box (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_group (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_address (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_route_addr (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_route (const char **p, const char *e, char **route)
Function: int mu_parse822_addr_spec (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_unix_mbox (const char **p, const char *e, mu_address_t *a)
Function: int mu_parse822_local_part (const char **p, const char *e, char **local_part)
Function: int mu_parse822_domain (const char **p, const char *e, char **domain)
Function: int mu_parse822_sub_domain (const char **p, const char *e, char **sub_domain)
Function: int mu_parse822_domain_ref (const char **p, const char *e, char **domain_ref)
Function: int mu_parse822_domain_literal (const char **p, const char *e, char **domain_literal)
Function: int mu_parse822_quote_string (char **quoted, const char *raw)
Function: int mu_parse822_quote_local_part (char **quoted, const char *raw)
Function: int mu_parse822_field_body (const char **p, const char *e, char **fieldbody)
Function: int mu_parse822_field_name (const char **p, const char *e, char **fieldname)
Function: int mu_parse822_day (const char **p, const char *e, int *day)
Function: int mu_parse822_date (const char **p, const char *e, int *day, int *mon, int *year)
Function: int mu_parse822_time (const char **p, const char *e, int *h, int *m, int *s, int *tz, const char **tz_name)
Function: int mu_parse822_date_time (const char **p, const char *e, struct tm *tm, mu_timezone *tz)

3.1.16 Mailcap

 
/* Prefix mu_mailcap_ is reserved. */
#include <mailutils/mailcap.h>

The standard RFC 1524 (A User Agent Configuration Mechanism) suggests a file format to be used to inform a mail user agent about facilities for handling mail in various format. The configuration file is known also as mailcap and it is tipically found in UNIX platforms, a example of ‘/etc/mailcap’:

 
application/pgp; gpg < %s | metamail; needsterminal; \
       test=test %{encapsulation}=entity ; copiousoutput

A mailcap file consists of a set of mailcap entries per line, lines beginning with ‘#’ are considered comments and ignored. Long mailcap entry may be continued on multiple lines if each line ends with a backslash character ‘\’, the multiline will be considered a single mailcap entry. The overall format in BNF:

 
Mailcap-File = *mailcap-line
Mailcap-Line = comment | mailcap-entry
Comment = newline | "#" * char newline
Newline = <newline as defined by OS convention>

Each mailcap entry consists of a number of fields, separated by semi-colons. The first two fields are required and must occur in the specified order, the remaining fields are optional.

 
Mailcap-Entry = typefield ";" view-command ";" *[ ";" field ]
Data Type: mu_mailcap_t, mu_mailcap_entry_t

The mu_mailcap_t and mu_mailcap_entry_t objects are used to hold information and it is an opaque data structure to the user. Functions are provided to retrieve information from the data structure.

 
                        mu_mailcap_t                  mu_mailcap_entry_t
-/etc/mailcap-  +--->/------------------------\  +-->/------------------\
(  alain   )         |  mu_mailcap_entry[0]*--|--+   |  typefield       |
                     |  mu_mailcap_entry[1]   |      |  view-command    |
                     |  .....                 |      |  field[0]        |
                     |  mu_mailcap_entry[n]   |      |  .....           |
                     \------------------------/      |  field[n]        |
                                                     \------------------/

An Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:

 
#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <mailutils/mailcap.h>
#include <mailutils/stream.h>
#include <mailutils/error.h>

int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  mu_stream_t stream = NULL;
  int status = 0;
  char *file = argc == 1 ? "/etc/mailcap" : argv[1];
  mu_mailcap_t mailcap = NULL;

  status = mu_file_stream_create (&stream, file, MU_STREAM_READ);
  if (status)
    {
      mu_error ("cannot create file stream %s: %s",
		file, mu_strerror (status));
      exit (1);
    }

  status = mu_stream_open (stream);
  if (status)
    {
      mu_error ("cannot open file stream %s: %s",
		file, mu_strerror (status));
      exit (1);
    }

  status = mu_mailcap_create (&mailcap, stream);
  if (status == 0)
    {
      int i;
      size_t count = 0;
      char buffer[256];

      mu_mailcap_entries_count (mailcap, &count);
      for (i = 1; i <= count; i++)
	{
	  size_t j;
	  mu_mailcap_entry_t entry = NULL;
	  size_t fields_count = 0;

	  printf ("entry[%d]\n", i);

	  mu_mailcap_get_entry (mailcap, i, &entry);

	  /* typefield.  */
	  mu_mailcap_entry_get_typefield (entry, buffer, 
					  sizeof (buffer), NULL);
	  printf ("\ttypefield: %s\n", buffer);
	  
	  /* view-command.  */
	  mu_mailcap_entry_get_viewcommand (entry, buffer, 
					    sizeof (buffer), NULL);
	  printf ("\tview-command: %s\n", buffer);

	  /* fields.  */
	  mu_mailcap_entry_fields_count (entry, &fields_count);
	  for (j = 1; j <= fields_count; j++)
	    {
	      int status = mu_mailcap_entry_get_field (entry, j, buffer, 
						       sizeof (buffer), NULL);
	      if (status)
		{
		  mu_error ("cannot retrieve field %lu: %s",
			    (unsigned long) j,
			    mu_strerror (status));
		  break;
		}
	      printf ("\tfields[%lu]: %s\n", (unsigned long) j, buffer);
	    }
	  printf ("\n");
	}
      mu_mailcap_destroy (&mailcap);
    }
  
  return 0;
}
Function: int mu_mailcap_create (mu_mailcap_t *mailcap, mu_stream_t stream)

The function allocates, parses the buffer from the stream and initializes mailcap. The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

MU_ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER

mailcap is NULL or stream is invalid.

Function: void mu_mailcap_destroy (mu_mailcap_t *mailcap)

Release any resources from the mailcap object.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entries_count (mu_mailcap_t mailcap, size_t *count)

The function returns the number of entries found in the mailcap. The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

mailcap or count is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailcap_get_entry (mu_mailcap_t mailcap, size_t no, mu_mailcap_entry_t *entry)

Returns in entry the mailcap entry of no.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_fields_count (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, size_t *count)

The function returns the number of fields found in the entry. The return value is 0 on success and a code number on error conditions:

EINVAL

entry or count is NULL.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_typefield (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)
Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_viewcommand (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)
Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_field (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, size_t no, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)
Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_value (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, const char *key, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)
Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_compose (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "compose" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_composetyped (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "composetyped" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_edit (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "edit" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_textualnewlines (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "textualnewlines" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_test (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "test" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_x11bitmap (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "x11-bitmap" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_description (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "description" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_nametemplate (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "nametemplate" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_get_notes (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, char *buffer, size_t buflen, size_t *n)

Helper function saving in buffer, the argument of "notes" field.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_needsterminal (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, int *on)

Helper function. Returns *on != 0 if the flag needsterminal is in the record.

Function: int mu_mailcap_entry_copiousoutput (mu_mailcap_entry_t entry, int *on)

Helper function. Returns *on != 0 if the flag copiousoutput is in the record.

3.2 Authentication Library

The functions from ‘libmailutils’ library get user information from the system user database. The library ‘libmu_auth’ extends this functionality, allowing ‘libmailutils’ functions to obtain information about a user from several places, like SQL database, etc. The method used is described in detail in authentication. This chapter contains a very succinct description of the underlying library mechanism.

3.2.1 Data Types

Data Type: mu_auth_fp

This is a pointer to authentication or authorization data. It is defined as follows:

 
typedef int (*mu_auth_fp) (struct mu_auth_data **return_data,
                           void *key,
                           void *func_data,
                           void *call_data);

Its arguments are:

return_data

Upon successful return authorization handler leaves in this memory location a pointer to the filled mu_auth_data structure with the user's information.

For authentication handlers this argument is always NULL and should be ignored.

key

The search key value. Its actual type depends upon type of the handler.

For authorization handlers it is const char* if the handler is called by mu_get_auth_by_name() and uid_t * if it is called by mu_get_auth_by_uid().

For authentication handlers it is always struct mu_auth_data* representing the user's data obtained by a previous call to a mu_get_auth_by_… function.

func_data

Any data associated with this handler.

call_data

Any call specific data. This argument is not used at the moment.

Data Type: mu_auth_data

The mu_auth_data is used to return the information about the user. It is similar to system struct passwd, except that it is more mailutils-specific. Its definition is:

 
struct mu_auth_data {
  /* These are from struct passwd */
  char    *name;       /* user name */
  char    *passwd;     /* user password */
  uid_t   uid;         /* user id */
  gid_t   gid;         /* group id */
  char    *gecos;      /* real name */
  char    *dir;        /* home directory */
  char    *shell;      /* shell program */
  /* */
  char    *mailbox;    /* Path to the user's system mailbox */
  int     change_uid;  /* Should the uid be changed? */
};
Data Type: mu_auth_module

The mu_auth_module structure contains full information about a libmu_auth module. It is declared as follows:

 
struct mu_auth_module {
  char           *name;              /* Module name */
  struct argp    *argp;              /* Corresponding argp structure */
  mu_auth_fp     authenticate;       /* Authentication function ... */
  void           *authenticate_data; /* ... and its specific data */
  mu_auth_fp     auth_by_name;       /* Get user info by user name */ 
  void           *auth_by_name_data; /* ... and its specific data */
  mu_auth_fp     auth_by_uid;        /* Get user info by user id */  
  void           *auth_by_uid_data;  /* ... and its specific data */
};

3.2.2 Initializing ‘libmu_auth

Function: void mu_auth_init (void)

This function registers the command line capability “auth”. It must be called after registering ‘libmu_auth’ modules and before calling mu_agrp_parse(). If an error occurs, this function prints diagnostic message and aborts the program.

Function: void MU_AUTH_REGISTER_ALL_MODULES (void)

This macro registers all default modules and calls mu_auth_init().

3.2.3 Module Creation and Destruction

Function: int mu_auth_data_alloc (struct mu_auth_data **ptr, const char *name, const char *passwd, uid_t uid, gid_t gid, const char *gecos, const char *dir, const char *shell, const char *mailbox, int change_uid)

Create a mu_auth_data structure and initialize it with the given values. Returns 0 on success and 1 otherwise.

Function: void mu_auth_data_free (struct mu_auth_data *ptr)

Free the mu_auth_data structure allocated by a call to mu_auth_data_alloc().

Function: void mu_auth_register_module (struct mu_auth_module *mod)

Register the module defined by the mod argument.

3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information

Function: int mu_auth_runlist (list_t flist, struct mu_auth_data **return_data, void *key, void *call_data);

The list is expected to contain mu_auth_fp pointers. Each of them is dereferenced and executed until either the list is exhausted or any of the functions returns non-zero, whichever occurs first. The return_data and key arguments are passed as the first two parameters to the function (see the definition of mu_auth_fp, notice the footnote), the call_data is passed as its last parameter.

The function returns 0 if none of the functions from list succeeded, i.e. returned non-zero value. Otherwise it returns the return code from the succeeded function.

Function: struct mu_auth_data * mu_get_auth_by_name (const char *username)

Search the information about given user by its username. Similar to system's getpwnam call).

Function: struct mu_auth_data * mu_get_auth_by_uid (uid_t uid)

Search the information about given user by its uid. Similar to system's getpwuid call).

Function: int mu_authenticate (struct mu_auth_data *auth_data, char *pass)

Authenticate the user whose data are in auth_data using password pass. Return 0 if the user is authenticated.

3.2.5 Existing Modules

Function: int mu_auth_nosupport (struct mu_auth_data **return_data, void *key, void *func_data, void *call_data);

The “not-supported” module. Always returns ENOSYS.

Variable: mu_auth_system_module

This module is always registered even if ‘libmu_auth’ is not linked. It performs usual authentication using system user database (‘/etc/password’ et al.)

Variable: mu_auth_generic_module

This module is always registered even if ‘libmu_auth’ is not linked. Both its authorization handlers are mu_auth_nosupport. Its authentication handler computes the MD5 or DES hash over the supplied password with the seed taken from passwd member of its key argument. Then it compares the obtained hash with the passwd member itself and returns 1 if both strings match.

Variable: mu_auth_pam_module

Implements PAM authentication. Both authorization handlers are mu_auth_nosupport().

Variable: mu_auth_sql_module

Implements authentication and authorization via MySQL database. The credentials for accessing the database are taken from global variables sql_host, sql_port, sql_user, sql_passwd and sql_db. The SQL queries for retrieving user information from global variables sql_getpwnam_query and sql_getpwuid_query. The variable sql_getpass_query keeps the query used for retrieving user's password. , for information on command line options used to set these variables.

Variable: mu_auth_virtual_module

Implements mu_get_auth_by_name method using virtual mail domains. Neither mu_get_auth_by_uid nor mu_authenticate is implemented. This module must be used together with generic module.

3.2.6 Using ‘libmu_auth’ in Your Programs

To link your program against ‘libmu_auth’, obtain loader arguments by running mailutils-config as follows:

 
mailutils-config --link auth

See section mailutils-config — Get the Information about the Mailutils Build, for more information about this utility.

Here is a sample Makefile fragment:

 
MU_LDFLAGS=`mailutils-config --link auth`
MU_INCLUDES=`mailutils-config --include`

myprog: myprog.c
        $(CC) -omyprog $(CFLAGS) $(MU_INCLUDES) myprog.c $(MU_LDFLAGS)

If your program will be using only default modules provided by the library, then it will suffice to call MU_AUTH_REGISTER_ALL_MODULES() somewhere near the start of your program. As an example, consider the following code fragment (it is taken from the imap4d daemon):

 
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  struct group *gr;
  int status = EXIT_SUCCESS;
 
  state = STATE_NONAUTH; /* Starting state in non-auth.  */

  MU_AUTH_REGISTER_ALL_MODULES ();
  mu_argp_parse (&argp, &argc, &argv, 0, imap4d_capa,
                 NULL, &daemon_param);
  …       

Otherwise, if your program will use it's own modules, first register them with mu_auth_register_module and then call mu_auth_init(), e.g.:

 
struct mu_auth_module radius_module = {
  …
};

struct mu_auth_module ext_module = {
  …
};

int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  mu_auth_register_module (&radius_module);
  mu_auth_register_module (&ext_module);
  mu_auth_init ();

  …

These two approaches may be combined, allowing you to use both your modules and the ones provided by Mailutils. Consider the example below:

 
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
  mu_auth_register_module (&radius_module);
  mu_auth_register_module (&ext_module);
  MU_AUTH_REGISTER_ALL_MODULES ();

  …
}

3.3 Mailutils to Scheme Interface

The library ‘libmu_scm’ provides an interface between Mailutils and Guile, allowing to access the Mailutils functionality from a Scheme program. For more information about Guile, refer to (guile)Top section `Overview' in The Guile Reference Manual. For information about Scheme programming language, See (r4rs)Top section `Top' in Revised(4) Report on the Algorithmic Language Scheme.

3.3.1 Address Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-personal address num

Return personal part of the numth email address from address.

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-comments address num

Return comment part of the numth email address from address.

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-email address num

Return email part of the numth email address from address.

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-domain address num

Return domain part of the numth email address from address.

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-local address num

Return local part of the numth email address from address.

Scheme procedure: mu-address-get-count address

Return number of parts in email address address.

Scheme procedure: mu-username->email name

Deduce user's email address from his username. If name is omitted, current username is assumed

3.3.2 Mailbox Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-mail-directory url

If url is given, sets it as a name of the user's mail directory. Returns the current value of the mail directory.

Scheme procedure: mu-folder-directory url

If url is given, sets it as a name of the user's folder directory. Returns the current value of the folder directory.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-open url mode

Opens the mailbox specified by url. mode is a string, consisting of the characters described below, giving the access mode for the mailbox

mode Meaning
r Open for reading.
w Open for writing.
a Open for appending to the end of the mailbox.
c Create the mailbox if it does not exist.
Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-close mbox

Closes mailbox mbox.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-get-url mbox

Returns url of the mailbox mbox.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-get-port mbox mode

Returns a port associated with the contents of the mbox. mode is a string defining operation mode of the stream. It may contain any of the two characters: ‘r’ for reading, ‘w’ for writing.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-get-message mbox msgno

Retrieve from message #msgno from the mailbox mbox.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-messages-count mbox

Returns number of messages in the mailbox mbox.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-expunge mbox

Expunges deleted messages from the mailbox mbox.

Scheme procedure: mu-mailbox-append-message mbox mesg

Appends message mesg to the mailbox mbox.

3.3.3 Message Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-message-create

Creates an empty message.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-copy mesg

Creates the copy of the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-destroy mesg

Destroys the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-set-header mesg header value replace

Sets new value to the header header of the message mesg. If header is already present in the message its value is replaced with the supplied one if the optional replace is #t. Otherwise, a new header is created and appended.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-size mesg

Returns the size of the message mesg .

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-lines mesg

Returns number of lines in the given message.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-sender mesg

Returns email address of the sender of the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-header mesg header

Returns value of the header header from the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-header-fields mesg headers

Returns the list of headers in the message mesg. Optional argument headers gives a list of header names to restrict return value to.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-set-header-fields mesg list replace

Set the headers in the message mesg from list list is a list of conses (cons HEADER VALUE). The function sets these headers in the message mesg. Optional parameter replace specifies whether the new header values should replace the headers already present in the message.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-delete mesg flag

Mark the message mesg as deleted. Optional argument flag allows to toggle deletion mark. The message is deleted if it is #t and undeleted if it is #f

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-flag mesg flag

Return value of the attribute flag of the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-set-flag mesg flag value

Set the attribute flag of the message mesg. If optional value is #f, the attribute is unset.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-user-flag mesg flag

Return the value of the user attribute flag from the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-set-user-flag mesg flag value

Set the given user attribute flag in the message mesg. If optional argument value is ‘#f’, the attribute is unset.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-port mesg mode full

Returns a port associated with the given mesg. mode is a string defining operation mode of the stream. It may contain any of the two characters: ‘r’ for reading, ‘w’ for writing. If optional argument full is specified, it should be a boolean value. If it is ‘#t’ then the returned port will allow access to any part of the message (including headers). If it is #f then the port accesses only the message body (the default).

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-body mesg

Returns the message body for the message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-multipart? mesg

Returns #t if mesg is a multipart MIME message.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-num-parts mesg

Returns number of parts in a multipart MIME message. Returns #f if the argument is not a multipart message.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-part mesg part

Returns part #part from a multipart MIME message mesg.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-send mesg mailer from to

Sends the message mesg. Optional mailer overrides default mailer settings in mu-mailer. Optional from and to give sender and receiver addresses.

Scheme procedure: mu-message-get-uid mesg

Returns uid of the message mesg

Scheme procedure: mu-body-read-line body

Read next line from the body.

Scheme procedure: mu-body-write body text

Append text to message body.

3.3.4 MIME Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-create flags mesg

Creates a new MIME object. Both arguments are optional. flags specifies the type of the object to create (‘0’ is a reasonable value). mesg gives the message to create the MIME object from.

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-multipart? mime

Returns #t if mime is a multipart object.

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-get-num-parts mime

Returns number of parts in the MIME object mime.

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-get-part mime num

Returns numth part from the MIME object mime.

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-add-part mime mesg

Adds mesg to the MIME object mime.

Scheme procedure: mu-mime-get-message mime

Converts MIME object mime to a message.

3.3.5 Logging Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-openlog ident option facility

Opens a connection to the system logger for Guile program. ident, option and facility have the same meaning as in openlog(3)

Scheme procedure: mu-logger prio text

Distributes text via syslogd priority prio.

Scheme procedure: mu-closelog

Closes the channel to the system logger opened by mu-openlog.

3.3.6 Other Functions

Scheme procedure: mu-register-format rest

Registers desired mailutils formats. Any number of arguments can be given. Each argument must be one of the following strings:

Argument Meaning
mbox Regular UNIX mbox format
mh MH mailbox format
maildir Maildir mailbox format
pop POP mailbox format
imap IMAP mailbox format
sendmail sendmail mailer format
smtp SMTP mailer format

If called without arguments, the function registers all available formats

Scheme procedure: mu-strerror err

Return the error message corresponding to err, which must be an integer value.

3.3.7 Direct Linking

If you plan to link your program directly to ‘libguile’, it will probably make sense to link ‘libmu_scm’ directly as well. The arguments to the program loader may be obtained by running

 
mailutils-config --link guile

See section mailutils-config — Get the Information about the Mailutils Build, for more information about this utility.

Here is a sample Makefile fragment:

 
MU_LDFLAGS=`mailutils-config --link guile`
MU_INCLUDES=`mailutils-config --include`

myprog: myprog.c
        $(CC) -omyprog $(CFLAGS) $(MU_INCLUDES) myprog.c $(MU_LDFLAGS)

3.3.8 Dynamic Linking

Dynamic linking is the preferred method of using ‘libmu_scm’. It uses Guile “use-modules” mechanism. An interface module ‘mailutils.scm’ is provided in order to facilitate using this method. This module is installed in the package data directory (by default it is ‘prefix/share/mailutils’). A sample use of this module is:

 
(set! %load-path (list "/usr/local/share/mailutils"))
(use-modules (mailutils))

# Now you may use mailutils functions:

(let ((mb (mu-mailbox-open "/var/spool/mail/gray" "r")))
...

Note, that you should explicitly modify the %load-path before calling use-modules, otherwise Guile will not be able to find ‘mailutils.scm’.

3.4 Sieve Library

Libmu_sieve is GNU implementation of the mail filtering language Sieve. The library is built around a Sieve Machine — an abstract computer constructed specially to handle mail filtering tasks. This computer has two registers: program counter and numeric accumulator; a runtime stack of unlimited depth and the code segment. A set of functions is provided for creating and destroying instances of Sieve Machine, manipulating its internal data, compiling and executing a sieve program.

The following is a typical scenario of using libmu_sieve:

  1. Application program creates the instance of sieve machine.
  2. Then mu_sieve_compile function is called to translate the Sieve source into an equivalent program executable by the Machine
  3. A mailbox is opened and associated with the Machine
  4. The Machine executes the program over the mailbox
  5. When the execution of the program is finished, all messages upon which an action was executed other than keep are marked with the delete flag. Thus, running mailbox_expunge upon the mailbox finishes the job, leaving in the mailbox only those messages that were preserved by the filter.
  6. Finally, the instance of Sieve Machine is destroyed and the resources allocated for it are reclaimed.

The following sections describe in detail the functions from the Sieve Library.

3.4.1 Sieve Data Types

Data Type: sieve_machine_t

This is an opaque data type representing a pointer to an instance of sieve machine. The sieve_machine_t keeps all information necessary for compiling and executing the script.

It is created by sieve_machine_create() and destroyed by sieve_machine_destroy(). The functions for manipulating this data type are described in Manipulating the Sieve Machine.

Data Type: mu_sieve_data_type

This enumeration keeps the possible types of sieve data. These are:

SVT_VOID

No datatype.

SVT_NUMBER

Numeric type.

SVT_STRING

Character string.

SVT_STRING_LIST

A mu_list_t. Each item in this list represents a character string.

SVT_TAG

A sieve tag. See mu_sieve_runtime_tag_t below.

SVT_IDENT

A character string representing an identifier.

SVT_VALUE_LIST

A mu_list_t. Each item in this list is of mu_sieve_value_t type.

SVT_POINTER

An opaque pointer.

Data Type: mu_sieve_value_t

The mu_sieve_value_t keeps an instance of sieve data. It is defined as follows:

 
typedef struct 
{
  mu_sieve_data_type type;        /* Type of the data */
  union {
    char *string;                 /* String value or identifier */
    size_t number;                /* Numeric value */
    mu_list_t list;               /* List value */
    mu_sieve_runtime_tag_t *tag;  /* Tag value */
    void *ptr;                    /* Pointer value */ 
  } v;
} 
mu_sieve_value_t;

Depending on the value of type member, following members of the union v keep the actual value:

SVT_VOID

Never appears.

SVT_NUMBER

The numeric value is kept in number member.

SVT_STRING

The string is kept in string member.

SVT_STRING_LIST
SVT_VALUE_LIST

The list itself is pointed to by list member

SVT_TAG

The tag value is pointed to by tag member.

SVT_IDENT

The string member points to the identifier name.

SVT_POINTER

The data are pointed to by ptr member.

Data Type: mu_sieve_tag_def_t

This structure represents a definition of a tagged (optional) argument to a sieve action or test. It is defined as follows:

 
typedef struct 
{
  char *name;                 /* Tag name */
  mu_sieve_data_type argtype; /* Type of tag argument. */
} 
mu_sieve_tag_def_t;

The name member points to the tag's name without leading colon. The argtype is set to SVT_VOID if the tag does not take argument, or to the type of the argument otherwise.

Data Type: mu_sieve_runtime_tag_t

This structure represents the tagged (optional) argument at a runtime. It is defined as:

 
struct mu_sieve_runtime_tag 
{
  char *tag;                   /* Tag name */
  mu_sieve_value_t *arg;       /* Tag argument (if any) */
};

The arg member is NULL if the tag does not take an argument.

Data Type: mu_sieve_locus_t

Objects of this type represent a location in the Sieve source file:

 
typedef struct
{
  const char *source_file;
  size_t source_line;
}
mu_sieve_locus_t;
Data Type: mu_sieve_handler_t

This is a pointer to function handler for a sieve action or test. It is defined as follows:

 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_handler_t) (mu_sieve_machine_t mach,
                                   mu_list_t args, 
                                   mu_list_t tags);

The arguments to the handler have the following meaning:

mach

Sieve machine being processed.

args

A list of required arguments to the handler

tags

A list of optional arguments (tags).

Data Type: mu_sieve_printf_t

A pointer to a diagnostic output function. It is defined as follows:

 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_printf_t) (void *data, 
                                  const char *fmt, va_list ap);
data

A pointer to application specific data. These data are passed as second argument to mu_sieve_machine_init().

fmt

Printf-like format string.

ap

Other arguments.

Data Type: mu_sieve_parse_error_t

This data type is declared as follows:

 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_parse_error_t) (void *data,
                                       const char *filename, 
                                       int lineno,
                                       const char *fmt, 
                                       va_list ap);

It is used to declare error handlers for parsing errors. The application-specific data are passed in the data argument. Arguments filename and line indicate the location of the error in the source text, while fmt and ap give verbose description of the error.

Data Type: mu_sieve_action_log_t

A pointer to the application-specific logging function:

 
typedef void (*mu_sieve_action_log_t) (void *data,
                                       const mu_sieve_locus_t *locus,
                                       size_t msgno, 
                                       mu_message_t msg,
                                       const char *action,
                                       const char *fmt, 
                                       va_list ap);
data

Application-specific data.

locus

Location in the Sieve source file.

script

Name of the sieve script being executed.

msgno

Ordinal number of the message in mailbox, if appropriate. When execution is started using sieve_message(), this argument is zero.

msg

The message this action is executed upon.

action

The name of the action.

fmt
var

These two arguments give the detailed description of the action.

Data Type: mu_sieve_relcmp_t
Data Type: mu_sieve_relcmpn_t
 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_relcmp_t) (int, int);  
typedef int (*mu_sieve_relcmpn_t) (size_t, size_t);  
Data Type: mu_sieve_comparator_t
 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_comparator_t) (const char *, const char *);

A pointer to the comparator handler function. The function compares its two operands and returns 1 if they are equal, and 0 otherwise. Notice, that the sense of the return value is inverted in comparison with most standard libc functions like stcmp(), etc.

Data Type: mu_sieve_retrieve_t
 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_retrieve_t) (void *item, void *data, int idx,
                                    char **pval);

A pointer to generic retriever function. See description of mu_sieve_vlist_compare() for details of its usage.

Data Type: mu_sieve_destructor_t
 
typedef void (*mu_sieve_destructor_t) (void *data);

A pointer to destructor function. The function frees any resources associated with data. See the description of mu_sieve_machine_add_destructor() for more information.

Data Type: mu_sieve_tag_checker_t
 
typedef int (*mu_sieve_tag_checker_t) (const char *name, 
                                       mu_list_t tags, 
                                       mu_list_t args)

A pointer to tag checker function. The purpose of the function is to perform compilation-time consistency test on tags. Its arguments are:

name

Name of the test or action whose tags are being checked.

tags

A list of mu_sieve_runtime_tag_t representing tags.

args

A list of mu_sieve_value_t representing required arguments to name.

The function is allowed to make any changes in tags and args. It should return 0 if the syntax is correct and non-zero otherwise. It is responsible for issuing the diagnostics in the latter case. [FIXME: describe how to do that]

3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine

This subsection describes functions used to create an instance of the sieve machine, read or alter its internal fields and destroy it.

Function: int mu_sieve_machine_init (mu_sieve_machine_t *mach, void *data)

The mu_sieve_machine_init() function creates an instance of a sieve machine. A pointer to the instance itself is returned in the argument mach. The user-specific data to be associated with the new machine are passed in data argument. The function returns 0 on success, non-zero error code otherwise,

Function: void mu_sieve_machine_destroy (mu_sieve_machine_t *pmach)

This function destroys the instance of sieve machine pointed to by mach parameter. After execution of mu_sieve_machine_destroy() pmach contains NULL. The destructors registered with mu_sieve_machine_add_destructor() are executed in LIFO order.

Function: int mu_sieve_machine_add_destructor (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_destructor_t destr, void *ptr);

This function registers a destructor function dest. The purpose of the destructor is to free any resources associated with the item ptr. The destructor function takes a single argument — a pointer to the data being destroyed. All registered destructors are called in reverse order upon execution of mu_sieve_machine_destroy(). Here's a short example of the use of this function:

 
static void
free_regex (void *data)
{
  regfree ((regex_t*)data);        
}

int
match_part_checker (const char *name, list_t tags, list_t args)
{
  regex_t *regex;

  /* Initialise the regex: */
  regex = mu_sieve_malloc (mach, sizeof (*regex));
  /* Make sure it will be freed when necessary */
  mu_sieve_machine_add_destructor (sieve_machine, free_regex, regex);
  .
  .
  .
}
Function: void * mu_sieve_get_data (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

This function returns the application-specific data associated with the instance of sieve machine. See mu_sieve_machine_init().

Function: mu_message_t mu_sieve_get_message (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

This function returns the current message.

Function: size_t mu_sieve_get_message_num (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

This function returns the current message number in the mailbox. If there are no mailbox, i.e. the execution of the sieve code is started with mu_sieve_message, this function returns 1.

Function: int mu_sieve_get_debug_level (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

Returns the debug level set for this instance of sieve machine.

Function: mu_ticket_t mu_sieve_get_ticket (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

Returns the authentication ticket for this machine.

Function: mu_mailer_t mu_sieve_get_mailer (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

Returns the mailer.

Function: int mu_sieve_get_locus (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_locus_t *locus)

Returns the locus in the Sieve source file corresponding to the code pointer where the Sieve machine currently is.

Function: char * mu_sieve_get_daemon_email (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

This function returns the daemon email associated with this instance of sieve machine. The daemon email is an email address used in envelope from addresses of automatic reply messages. By default its local part is ‘<MAILER-DAEMON>’ and the domain part is the machine name.

Function: void mu_sieve_set_error (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_printf_t error_printer)

This function sets the error printer function for the machine. If it is not set, the default error printer will be used. It is defined as follows:

 
int
_sieve_default_error_printer (void *unused, const char *fmt, 
                              va_list ap)
{
  return mu_verror (fmt, ap);
}
Function: void mu_sieve_set_parse_error (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_parse_error_t p)

This function sets the parse error printer function for the machine. If it is not set, the default parse error printer will be used. It is defined as follows:

 
int
_sieve_default_parse_error (void *unused,
                            const char *filename, int lineno,
                            const char *fmt, va_list ap)
{
  if (filename)
    fprintf (stderr, "%s:%d: ", filename, lineno);
  vfprintf (stderr, fmt, ap);
  fprintf (stderr, "\n");
  return 0;
}
Function: void mu_sieve_set_debug (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_printf_t debug);

This function sets the debug printer function for the machine. If it is not set, the default debug printer is NULL which means no debugging information will be displayed.

Function: void mu_sieve_set_debug_level (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_debug_t dbg, int level)

This function sets the debug level for the given instance of sieve machine. The dbg argument is the mu_debug_t object to be used with mailutils library, the level argument specifies the debugging level for the sieve library itself. It is a bitwise or of the following values:

MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_TRACE

Trace the execution of the sieve script.

MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_INSTR

Print the sieve machine instructions as they are executed.

MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_DISAS

Dump the disassembled code of the sieve machine. Do not run it.

MU_SIEVE_DRY_RUN

Do not executed the actions, only show what would have been done.

Function: void mu_sieve_set_logger (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_sieve_action_log_t logger)

This function sets the logger function. By default the logger function is NULL, which means that the executed actions are not logged.

Function: void mu_sieve_set_ticket (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_ticket_t ticket)

This function sets the authentication ticket to be used with this machine.

Function: void mu_sieve_set_mailer (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_mailer_t mailer)

This function sets the mailer. The default mailer is "sendmail:".

Function: void mu_sieve_set_daemon_email (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *email)

This functions sets the daemon email for reject and redirect actions.

Function: int mu_sieve_is_dry_run (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

The mu_sieve_is_dry_run() returns 1 if the machine is in dry run state, i.e. it will only log the actions that would have been executed without actually executing them. The dry run state is set by calling mu_sieve_set_debug_level() if its last argument has the MU_SIEVE_DRY_RUN bit set.

Function: const char * mu_sieve_type_str (mu_sieve_data_type type)

Returns the string representation for the given sieve data type. The return value is a pointer to a static constant string.

3.4.3 Logging and Diagnostic Functions

Function: void mu_sieve_error (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *fmt, …)

Format and output an error message using error printer of the machine mach.

Function: void mu_sieve_debug (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *fmt, …)

Format and output a debug message using debug printer of the machine mach.

Function: void mu_sieve_log_action (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *action, const char *fmt, …)

Log a sieve action using logger function associated with the machine mach.

Function: void mu_sieve_abort (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

Immediately abort the execution of the script.

3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions

Function: mu_sieve_register_t * mu_sieve_test_lookup (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name)

Find a register object describing the test name. Returns NULL if no such test exists.

Function: mu_sieve_register_t * mu_sieve_action_lookup (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name)

Find a register object describing the action name. Returns NULL if no such action exists.

Function: int mu_sieve_register_test (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name, mu_sieve_handler_t handler, mu_sieve_data_type *arg_types, mu_sieve_tag_group_t *tags, int required)
Function: int mu_sieve_register_action (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name, mu_sieve_handler_t handler, mu_sieve_data_type *arg_types, mu_sieve_tag_group_t *tags, int required)
Function: int mu_sieve_register_comparator (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name, int required, mu_sieve_comparator_t is, mu_sieve_comparator_t contains, mu_sieve_comparator_t matches, mu_sieve_comparator_t regex, mu_sieve_comparator_t eq)
Function: int mu_sieve_tag_lookup (mu_list_t taglist, char *name, mu_sieve_value_t **arg)
Function: int mu_sieve_load_ext (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name)

3.4.5 Memory Allocation

The following functions act as their libc counterparts. The allocated memory is associated with the mach argument and is automatically freed upon the call to mu_sieve_machine_destroy (mach).

Function: void * mu_sieve_malloc (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, size_t size)

Allocates size bytes and returns a pointer to the allocated memory.

Function: char * mu_sieve_mstrdup (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *str)

This function returns a pointer to a new string which is a duplicate of the string str.

Function: void * mu_sieve_mrealloc (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, void *ptr, size_t size)

Changes the size of the memory block pointed to by ptr to size bytes. The contents will be unchanged to the minimum of the old and new sizes; newly allocated memory will be uninitialized. If ptr is NULL, the call is equivalent to mu_sieve_malloc(mach, size); if size is equal to zero, the call is equivalent to mu_sieve_mfree(ptr). Unless ptr is NULL, it must have been returned by an earlier call to mu_sieve_malloc() or mu_sieve_mrealloc().

Function: void mu_sieve_mfree (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, void *ptr)

mu_sieve_mfree() frees the memory space pointed to by ptr and detaches it from the destructor list of mach. The ptr must have been returned by a previous call to mu_sieve_malloc() or mu_sieve_mrealloc(). Otherwise, or if mu_sieve_mfree(ptr) has already been called before, undefined behaviour occurs.

If ptr is NULL, no operation is performed.

3.4.6 Compiling and Executing the Script

Function: int mu_sieve_compile (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, const char *name)

Compile the sieve script from the file name.

Function: int mu_sieve_mailbox (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_mailbox_t mbox)

Execute the code from the given instance of sieve machine mach over each message in the mailbox mbox.

Function: int mu_sieve_message (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_message_t message)

Execute the code from the given instance of sieve machine mach over the message.

Function: int mu_sieve_disass (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)

Dump the disassembled code of the sieve machine mach.

3.4.7 Writing Loadable Commands

This section contains an example of how to write external loadable commands for GNU libmu_sieve.

 
/*  This is an example on how to write extension tests for GNU sieve.
    It provides test "numaddr".

    Syntax:   numaddr [":over" / ":under"] <header-names: string-list>
              <limit: number>

    The "numaddr" test counts Internet addresses in structured headers
    that contain addresses.  It returns true if the total number of
    addresses satisfies the requested relation:

    If the argument is ":over" and the number of addresses is greater than
    the number provided, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

    If the argument is ":under" and the number of addresses is less than
    the number provided, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

    If the argument is empty, ":over" is assumed. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
# include <config.h>
#endif  

#include <stdlib.h>
#include <mailutils/sieve.h>

struct val_ctr {  /* Data passed to the counter function */
  mu_header_t hdr;   /* Headers of the current message */
  size_t limit;   /* Limit for the number of addresses */
  size_t count;   /* Number of addresses counted so far */
};

/* Count addresses in a single header value.

   Input:
     ITEM is the name of the header to scan.
     DATA is a pointer to the val_ctr structure 
   Return value:
     non-zero if the limit on the number of addresses has been reached. */
     
static int
_count_items (void *item, void *data)
{
  char *name = item;
  struct val_ctr *vp = data;
  char *val;
  mu_address_t addr;
  size_t count = 0;
  
  if (mu_header_aget_value (vp->hdr, name, &val))
    return 0;
  if (mu_address_create (&addr, val) == 0)
    {
      mu_address_get_count (addr, &count);
      mu_address_destroy (&addr);
      vp->count += count;
    }
  free (val);
  return vp->count >= vp->limit;
}

/* Handler for the numaddr test */
static int
numaddr_test (mu_sieve_machine_t mach, mu_list_t args, mu_list_t tags)
{
  mu_sieve_value_t *h, *v;
  struct val_ctr vc;
  int rc;
  
  if (mu_sieve_get_debug_level (mach) & MU_SIEVE_DEBUG_TRACE)
    {
      mu_sieve_locus_t locus;
      mu_sieve_get_locus (mach, &locus);
      mu_sieve_debug (mach, "%s:%lu: NUMADDR\n",
		   locus.source_file,
		   (unsigned long) locus.source_line);
    }

  /* Retrieve required arguments: */
  /* First argument: list of header names */
  h = mu_sieve_value_get (args, 0);
  if (!h)
    {
      mu_sieve_error (mach, "numaddr: can't get argument 1");
      mu_sieve_abort (mach);
    }
  /* Second argument: Limit on the number of addresses */
  v = mu_sieve_value_get (args, 1);
  if (!v)
    {
      mu_sieve_error (mach, "numaddr: can't get argument 2");
      mu_sieve_abort (mach);
    }

  /* Fill in the val_ctr structure */
  mu_message_get_header (mu_sieve_get_message (mach), &vc.hdr);
  vc.count = 0;
  vc.limit = v->v.number;

  /* Count the addresses */
  rc = mu_sieve_vlist_do (h, _count_items, &vc);

  /* Here rc >= 1 iff the counted number of addresses is greater or equal
     to vc.limit. If `:under' tag was given we reverse the return value */
  if (mu_sieve_tag_lookup (tags, "under", NULL))
    rc = !rc;

  return rc;
}

/* Syntactic definitions for the numaddr test */

/* Required arguments: */
static mu_sieve_data_type numaddr_req_args[] = {
  SVT_STRING_LIST,
  SVT_NUMBER,
  SVT_VOID
};

/* Tagged arguments: */
static mu_sieve_tag_def_t numaddr_tags[] = {
  { "over", SVT_VOID },
  { "under", SVT_VOID },
  { NULL }
};

static mu_sieve_tag_group_t numaddr_tag_groups[] = {
  { numaddr_tags, NULL },
  { NULL }
};

/* Initialization function. It is the only function exported from this
   module. */
int
SIEVE_EXPORT(numaddr,init) (mu_sieve_machine_t mach)
{
  return mu_sieve_register_test (mach, "numaddr", numaddr_test,
                              numaddr_req_args, numaddr_tag_groups, 1);
}

4. Sieve Language

The input language understood by the GNU Sieve Library is a superset of the Sieve language as described in RFC 3028.

4.1 Lexical Structure

Whitespace and Comments

Comments are semantically equivalent to whitespace and can be used anyplace that whitespace is (with one exception in multi-line strings, as described below).

There are two kinds of comments: hash comments, that begin with a ‘#’ character that is not contained within a string and continue until the next newline, and C-style or bracketed comments, that are delimited by ‘/*’ and ‘*/’ tokens. The bracketed comments may span multiple lines. E.g.:

 
if size :over 100K
  { # this is a comment
    discard;
  }
  
if size :over 100K
  { /* this is a comment
       this is still a comment */ discard /* this is a comment again
     */ ;
  }

Like in C, bracketed comments do not nest.

Lexical Tokens

The basic lexical entities are identifiers and literals.

An identifier is a sequence of letters, digits and underscores, that begins with a letter or underscore. For example, header and check_822_again are valid identifiers, whereas 1st is not. A special form of identifier is tag: it is an identifier prefixed with a colon (‘:’), e.g.: :comparator.

A literal is a data that is not executed, merely evaluated “as is”, to be used as arguments to commands. There are four kinds of literals:

4.2 Syntax

Being designed for the sole purpose of filtering mail, Sieve has a very simple syntax.

4.2.1 Commands

The basic syntax element is a command. It is defined as follows:

 
command-name [tags] args

where command-name is an identifier representing the name of the command, tags is an optional list of optional or tagged arguments and args is a list of required or positional arguments.

Positional arguments are literals delimited with whitespace. They provide the command with the information necessary to its proper functioning. Each command has a fixed number of positional arguments. It is an error to supply more arguments to the command or to give it fewer arguments than it accepts.

Optional arguments allow to modify the behaviour of the command, like command line options in UNIX do. They are a list of tags (see section Lexical Structure) separated by whitespace. An optional argument may have at most one parameter.

Each command understands a set of optional arguments. Supplying it tags that it does not understand results in an error.

For example, consider the following command

 
header :mime :comparator "i;octet" ["to", "from"] "bug-mailutils@gnu.org"

Here, given that header takes two positional arguments: header is command name, the list ["to", "from"] is first positional argument and the string "bug-mailutils@gnu.org" is second positional argument. There are two optional arguments: :mime and :comparator. The latter has a string "i;octet" as its parameter.

4.2.2 Actions Described

An action is a Sieve command that performs some operation over a message. Actions do the main job in any Sieve program. Syntactically, an action is a command terminated with semicolon, e.g.:

 
keep;

fileinto "mbox";

GNU Sieve provides the full set of actions described in RFC 3028. It also allows to extend this set using loadable actions. See section Actions, for detailed discussion of actions.

4.2.3 Control Flow

The only control flow statement Sieve has is if statement. In its simplest form it is:

 
if condition { … }

The effect of this statement is that the sequence of actions between the curly braces is executed only if the condition evaluates to true.

A more elaborate form of this statement allows to execute two different sets of actions depending on whether the condition is true or not:

 
if condition { … } else { … }

The most advanced form of the “if” statement allows to select an action depending on what condition from the set of conditions is met.

 
if cond1 { … } elsif cond2 { … } else { … }

There may be any number of “elsif” branches in an “if” statement. However it may have at most one “else” branch. Notes for C programmers:

  1. The braces surrounding each branch of an “if” statement are required.
  2. The “else if” construct is disallowed. Use “elsif” keyword instead.

Here's an example of “if” statement:

 
if header :contains "from" "coyote"
  {
    discard;
  }
elsif header :contains ["subject"] ["$$$"]
  {
    discard;
  }
else
  {
    fileinto "INBOX";
  }

The following section describes in detail conditions used in “if” statements.

4.2.4 Tests and Conditions

Tests are Sieve commands that return boolean value. E.g. the test

 
header :contains "from" "coyote"

returns true only if the header “From” of the current message contains substring “coyote”.

The tests shipped with the GNU Sieve are described in Tests.

Condition is a Sieve expression that evaluates to true or false. In its simplest form, condition is just a Sieve test.

To reverse the sense of a condition use keyword not, e.g.:

 
not header :contains "from" "coyote"

The results of several conditions may be joined together by logical and and or operations. The special form allof takes several tests as its arguments and computes the logical and of their results. Similarly, the form anyof performs logical or over the results of its arguments. E.g.:

 
if anyof (not exists ["From", "Date"],
          header :contains "from" "fool@example.edu")
  {
    discard;
  }

4.3 Preprocessor

Preprocessor statements are a GNU extension to the Sieve language. The syntax for a preprocessor statement is similar to that used in C programming language, i.e. a pound character (‘#’) followed by a preprocessor directive and its arguments. Any amount of whitespace can be inserted between the ‘#’ and the directive. Currently implemented directives are include and searchpath.

Sieve #include directive

The #include directive reads in the contents of the given file. The contents is “inserted” into the text being parsed starting at the line where the directive appears. The directive takes two forms:

#include "filename"

The filename is taken relative to the current directory.

#include <filename>"

The filename is searched in the list of include directories as specified by the ‘-I’ command line options.

If filename starts with a directory separator character (‘/’) both forms have the same effect.

Sieve #searchpath directive

The #searchpath directive adds its argument to the list of directories searched for loadable modules. It has the same effect as library-path Sieve configuration statement (see library-path).

4.4 Require Statement

 
Syntax:   require string;
          require string-list;

The require statement informs the parser that a script makes use of a certain extension. Multiple capabilities can be declared using the second form of the statement. The actual handling of a capability name depends on its suffix.

If the name starts with ‘comparator-’, it is understood as a request to use the specified comparator. The comparator name consists of the characters following the suffix.

If the name starts with ‘test-’, it means a request to use the given test. The test name consists of the characters following the suffix.

Otherwise, the capability is understood as a name of an action to be used.

The require statement, if present, must be used before any other statement that is using the required capability. As an extension, the GNU sieve allows the require and any other statements to be interspersed.

By default the following actions and comparators need not be explicitly required:

Example:

 
require ["fileinto", "reject"];

require "fileinto";

require "comparator-i;ascii-numeric";

When processing arguments for require statement, GNU libmu_sieve uses the following algorithm:

  1. Look up the name in a symbol table. If the name begins with ‘comparator-’ it is looked up in the comparator table. If it begins with ‘test-’, the test table is used instead. Otherwise the name is looked up in the action table.
  2. If the name is found, the search is terminated.
  3. Otherwise, transform the name. First, any ‘comparator-’ or ‘test-’ prefix is stripped. Then, any character other than alphanumeric characters, ‘.’ and ‘,’ is replaced with dash (‘-’). The name thus obtained is used as a file name of an external loadable module.
  4. Try to load the module. The module is searched in the following search paths (in the order given):
    1. Mailutils module directory. By default it is ‘$prefix/lib/mailutils’.
    2. Sieve library path as given with the ‘-L’ options in the command line
    3. Additional search directories specified with the #searchpath directive.
    4. The value of the environment variable LTDL_LIBRARY_PATH.
    5. System library search path: The system dependent library search path (e.g. on Linux it is set by the contents of the file ‘/etc/ld.so.conf’ and the value of the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH).

    The value of LTDL_LIBRARY_PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH must be a colon-separated list of absolute directories, for example, ‘"/usr/lib/mypkg:/lib/foo"’.

    In any of these directories, libmu_sieve first attempts to find and load the given filename. If this fails, it tries to append the following suffixes to the file name:

    1. the libtool archive extension ‘.la
    2. the extension used for native dynamic libraries on the host platform, e.g., ‘.so’, ‘.sl’, etc.
  5. If the module is found, libmu_sieve executes its initialization function (see below) and again looks up the name in the symbol table. If found, search terminates successfully.
  6. If either the module is not found, or the symbol wasn't found after execution of the module initialization function, search is terminated with an error status. libmu_sieve then issues the following diagnostic message:
     
    source for the required action NAME is not available
    

4.5 Comparators

GNU libmu_sieve supports the following built-in comparators:

i;octet

This comparator simply compares the two arguments octet by octet

i;ascii-casemap

It treats uppercase and lowercase characters in the ASCII subset of UTF-8 as the same. This is the default comparator.

i;ascii-numeric

Treats the two arguments as ASCII representation of decimal numbers and compares their numeric values. This comparator must be explicitly required prior to use.

4.6 Tests

This section describes the built-in tests supported by GNU libmu_sieve. In the discussion below the following macro-notations are used:

match-type

This tag specifies the matching type to be used with the test. It can be one of the following:

:is

The :is match type describes an absolute match; if the contents of the first string are absolutely the same as the contents of the second string, they match. Only the string “frobnitzm” is the string “frobnitzm”. The null key “:is” and only “:is” the null value. This is the default match-type.

:contains

The :contains match type describes a substring match. If the value argument contains the key argument as a substring, the match is true. For instance, the string “frobnitzm” contains “frob” and “nit”, but not “fbm”. The null key “” is contained in all values.

:matches

The :matches version specifies a wildcard match using the characters ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ matches zero or more characters, and ‘?’ matches a single character. ‘?’ and ‘*’ may be escaped as ‘\\?’ and ‘\\*’ in strings to match against themselves. The first backslash escapes the second backslash; together, they escape the ‘*’.

:regex

The :regex version specifies a match using POSIX Extended Regular Expressions.

:value relation

The :value match type does a relational comparison between strings. Valid values for relation are:

"eq"

Equal

"ne"

Not Equal

"gt"

Greater Than

"ge"

Greater than or Equal

"lt"

Less Than

"le"

Less than or Equal

:count relation

This match type first determines the number of the specified entities (headers, addresses, etc.) in the message and does a relational comparison of the number of entities to the values specified in the test expression. The test expression must be a list of one element.

comparator

A comparator syntax item is defined as follows:

 
:comparator "comparator-name"

It instructs sieve to use the given comparator with the test. If comparator-name is not one of ‘i;octet’, ‘i;ascii-casemap’ it must be required prior to using it. For example:

 
require "comparator-i;ascii-numeric";

if header :comparator "i;ascii-numeric" :is "X-Num" "10"
  {
    ...
address-part

This syntax item is used when testing structured Internet addresses. It specifies which part of an address must be used in comparisons. Exactly one of the following tags may be used:

:all

Use the whole address. This is the default.

:localpart

Use local part of the address.

:domain

Use domain part of the address.

Notice, that match-type modifiers interact with comparators. Some comparators are not suitable for matching with :contains or :matches. If this occurs, sieve issues an appropriate error message. For example, the statement:

 
if header :matches :comparator "i;ascii-numeric"

would result in the following error message:

 
comparator `i;ascii-numeric' is incompatible with match type `:matches'
in call to `header'

GNU Sieve supports two kinds of tests. Built-in tests are defined within the library and do not require any external files. External tests are loadable modules that can be linked in at run time using the require statement (see section Require Statement).

4.6.1 Built-in Tests

Test: false

This test always evaluates to “false”.

Test: true

This test always evaluates to “true”.

Test: address [address-part]   [comparator]   [match-type]   header-names key-list

Tagged arguments:

address-part

Selects the address part to compare. Default is the whole email address (:all).

comparator

Specifies the comparator to be used instead of the default i;ascii-casemap.

match-type

Specifies the match type to be used instead of the default :is.

Required arguments:

header-names

A list of header names.

key-list

A list of address values.

The address test matches Internet addresses in structured headers that contain addresses. It returns true if any header contains any key in the specified part of the address, as modified by comparator and match-type optional arguments.

This test returns true if any combination of the header-names and key-list arguments match.

The address primitive never acts on the phrase part of an email address, nor on comments within that address. Use the header test instead. It also never acts on group names, although it does act on the addresses within the group construct.

Example:

 
if address :is :all "from" "tim@example.com"
  {
     discard;
  } 
Test: size [:over | :under] limit(number)

The size test deals with the size of a message. The required argument limit represents the size of the message in bytes. It may be suffixed with the following quantifiers:

k
K

The number is expressed in kilobytes.

m
M

The number is expressed in megabytes.

g
G

The number is expressed in gigabytes.

If the tagged argument is ‘:over’, and the size of the message is greater than number, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

If the argument is ‘:under’, and the size of the message is less than the number, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

Otherwise, the test is true only if the size of the message equals exactly number. This is a GNU extension.

The size of a message is defined to be the number of octets from the initial header until the last character in the message body.

Test: envelope [address-part]   [comparator]   [match-type]   envelope-part(string-list)   key-list(string-list)

Tagged arguments:

address-part

Selects the address part to compare. Default is the whole email address (:all).

comparator

Specifies the comparator to be used instead of the default i;ascii-casemap.

match-type

Specifies the match type to be used instead of the default :is.

Required arguments:

envelope-parts

A list of envelope parts to operate upon.

key-list

A list of address values.

The envelope test is true if the specified part of the SMTP envelope matches the specified key.

If the envelope-part strings is (case insensitive) ‘from’, then matching occurs against the FROM address used in the SMTP MAIL command.

Notice, that due to the limitations imposed by SMTP envelope structure the use of any other values in envelope-parts header is meaningless.

Test: exists header-names(string-list)

Required arguments:

header-names

List of message header names.


The exists test is true if the headers listed in header-names argument exist within the message. All of the headers must exist or the test is false.

The following example throws out mail that doesn't have a From header and a Date header:

 
if not exists ["From","Date"]
  {
     discard;
  }
Test: header [comparator]   [match-type]   [:mime]   header-names(string-list)   key-list(string-list)

Tagged arguments:

comparator

Specifies the comparator to be used instead of the default i;ascii-casemap.

match-type

Specifies the match type to be used instead of the default :is.

:mime

This tag instructs header to search through the mime headers in multipart messages as well.


Required arguments:

header-names

A list of header names.

key-list

A list of header values.


The header test evaluates to true if any header name matches any key. The type of match is specified by the optional match argument, which defaults to ":is" if not explicitly given.

The test returns true if any combination of the header-names and key-list arguments match.

If a header listed in header-names exists, it contains the null key (‘""’). However, if the named header is not present, it does not contain the null key. So if a message contained the header

 
X-Caffeine: C8H10N4O2

these tests on that header evaluate as follows:

 
header :is ["X-Caffeine"] [""] ⇒ false
header :contains ["X-Caffeine"] [""] ⇒ true

4.6.2 External Tests

Test: numaddr [:over | :under]   header-names(string-list)   count(number)

Synopsis:

 
require "test-numaddr";
…
if numaddr args
  {
    …
  }

Description:

This test is provided as an example of loadable extension tests. You must use ‘require "test-numaddr"’ statement before actually using it.

The numaddr test counts Internet addresses in structured headers that contain addresses. It returns true if the total number of addresses satisfies the requested relation.

If the tagged argument is ‘:over’ and the number of addresses is greater than count, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

If the tagged argument is ‘:under’ and the number of addresses is less than count, the test is true; otherwise, it is false.

If the tagged argument is not given, ‘:over’ is assumed.

Test: spamd [:host tcp-host(string)]   [:port tcp-port(number)]   [:socket unix-socket(string)]   [:user name(string)]   [:over | :under limit(string)]

Synopsis:

 
require "test-spamd";
…
if spamd args
  {
    # This is spam
    …
  }

Description:

This test is an interface to SpamAssassin filter. It connects to the spamd daemon using connection parameters specified by tagged arguments :host and :port (if the daemon is listening on an INET socket), or :socket (if the daemon is listening on a UNIX socket) and returns true, if SpamAssassin qualifies the message as spam. Tagged argument limit alters the default behavior. Its value is a string representation of a floating point number. If the tag :over is used, then the test returns true if the spam score returned from SpamAssassin is greater than limit. Otherwise, if :under is used, the test returns true if the spam score is less than limit. The comparison takes into account three decimal digits.

Tagged argument :user allows to select a specific user profile. If it is not given, the user name is determined using the effective UID.

Before returning, the spamd test adds the following headers to the message:

X-Spamd-Status

YES’ or ‘NO’, depending on whether the message is qualified as spam or ham.

X-Spamd-Score

Actual spam score value.

X-Spamd-Threshold

Spam score threshold, as configured in SpamAssassin settings.

X-Spamd-Keywords

Comma-separated list of keywords, describing the spam checks that succeeded for this message.


Example:

 
request "test-spamd";

if spamd :host 127.0.0.1 :port 3333
  {
     discard;
  }
Test: list [comparator] [match-type]   [ :delim delimiters(string) ]   headers(string-list) keys(string-list)

Synopsis:

 
require "test-list";
if list args
  {
     … 
  }

Description:

The list test evaluates to true if any of headers match any key from keys. Each header is regarded as containing a list of keywords. By default, comma is assumed as list separator. This can be overridden by specifying the :delim tag, whose value is a string consisting of valid list delimiter characters.


Example:

This test can be used in conjunction with the spamd test described above:

 
require ["fileinto", "test-spamd", "test-list"];

if spamd :host 127.0.0.1 :port 3333
  {
     if list :matches :delim " ,"
             "X-Spamd-Keywords" [ "HTML_*", "FORGED_*" ]
       {      
          fileinto "~/mail/spam";
       }
     else
       {
          discard;
       }
  }
Test: timestamp [:before | :after]   header(string) date(string)

Synopsis:

 
require "test-timestamp";

if timestamp arg
  {
     …
  }

Description:

The timestamp test compares the value of a structured date header field (header) with the given date (date).

If the tagged argument is :after and the date from the header is after the specified date the result is true, otherwise, if the header date is before the given date, the result is false.

If the tagged argument is :before and the date from the header is before the specified date the result is true, otherwise, if the header date is after the given date, the result is false.

If no tagged argument is supplied, :after is assumed.

Almost any date format is understood. See section Date Input Formats, for a detailed information on date formats.


Example:

The test below succeeds if the date in ‘X-Expire-Timestamp’ header is more than 5 days older than the current date:

 
require "test-timestamp";

if timestamp :before "X-Expire-Timestamp" "now - 5 days"
  {
     discard;
  }

4.7 Actions

There are two groups of GNU Sieve actions: built-in actions, which are defined within the library, and external actions, i.e. loadable modules that can be linked in at run time using the require statement (see section Require Statement).

4.7.1 Built-in Actions

The GNU libmu_sieve supports the following built-in actions:

Among them the first three actions do not need to be explicitly required by a require statement, while the others do.

These actions are described in detail below.

Action: stop

The stop action ends all processing. If no actions have been executed, then the keep action is taken.

Action: keep

The effect of this action is to preserve the current message in the mailbox. This action is executed if no other action has been executed.

Action: discard

Discard silently throws away the current message. No notification is returned to the sender, the message is deleted from the mailbox.

Example:

 
if header :contains ["from"] ["idiot@example.edu"]
  {
    discard;
  }

Action: fileinto [:permissions mode] folder

Required arguments:

folder

A string representing the folder name

Tagged arguments:

:permissions mode

Specifies the permissions to use, if the mailbox is created.

The fileinto action delivers the message into the specified folder. If the folder is local, it is created using permissions ‘0600’, for regular files, and ‘0700’ for directories. This default can be changed by using the :permissions tag. Its argument is a mode specification, similar to that used by chmod shell utility. It is a list of permissions settings separated by commas. Each setting begins with one of the following letters:

g

Set permissions for the users in the file group.

o

Set permissions for users not in the file's group.

This letter must be followed by either ‘+’ or ‘=’ and the list of permissions to be set. This latter list is a string containing any one or both of the following characters:

r

Grant permission to read.

w

Grant permission to write.

For example, the following instruction creates the mailbox ‘~/shared’ which will be world readable and writable for the group:

 
  fileinto :permissions "g=rw,o=r" "~/shared"

Notice that:

  1. The :permissions setting are affected by the current umask value.
  2. Only r and w permissions can be set, since other permissions do not seem to be useful for mailboxes. However, for mailboxes that have a directory structure (such as maildir and MH), any settings in ‘g’ and ‘o’ sets imply setting the executable bit.
  3. Owner's permissions cannot be set. The owner always has all permissions on the mailbox he created.
  4. The :permissions settings apply only to local mailboxes. They are ignored for remote mailboxes.
Action: reject reason

The optional reject action refuses delivery of a message by sending back a message delivery notification to the sender. It resends the message to the sender, wrapping it in a “reject” form, noting that it was rejected by the recipient. The required argument reason is a string specifying the reason for rejecting the message.

Example:

If the message contained

 
Date: Tue, 1 Apr 1997 09:06:31 -0800 (PST)
From: coyote@desert.example.org
To: roadrunner@acme.example.com
Subject: I have a present for you

I've got some great birdseed over here at my place.
Want to buy it?

and the user's script contained:

 
if header :contains "from" "coyote@desert.example.org"
  {
    reject "I am not taking mail from you, and I don't want
            your birdseed, either!";
  }

then the original sender <coyote@desert.example.org> would receive the following notification:

 
To: <coyote@desert.example.org>
X-Authentication-Warning: roadrunner set sender using -f flag
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary=----- =_aaaaaaaaaa0
MIME-Version: 1.0
----- =_aaaaaaaaaa0
The original message was received at
Tue, 1 Apr 1997 09:07:15 -0800 from
coyote@desert.example.org.
Message was refused by recipient's mail filtering program.
Reason given was as follows:

I am not taking mail from you, and I don't want your
birdseed, either!

----- =_aaaaaaaaaa0
Content-Type: message/delivery-status

Reporting-UA: sieve; GNU Mailutils 0.1.3
Arrival-Date: Tue, 1 Apr 1997 09:07:15 -0800
Final-Recipient: RFC822; roadrunner@acme.example.com
Action: deleted
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically;deleted
Last-Attempt-Date: Tue, 1 Apr 1997 09:07:15 -0800

----- =_aaaaaaaaaa0
Content-Type: message/rfc822

From: coyote@desert.example.org
To: roadrunner@acme.example.com
Subject: I have a present for you

I've got some great birdseed over here at my place.
Want to buy it?
----- =_aaaaaaaaaa0

If the reason argument is rather long, the common approach is to use the combination of the text: and #include keywords, e.g.:

 
if header :mime :matches "Content-Type"
          [ "*application/msword;*", "*audio/x-midi*" ]
  {
    reject text:
#include "nomsword.txt"
    .
    ;
  }
Action: redirect address

The redirect action is used to send the message to another user at a supplied address, as a mail forwarding feature does. This action makes no changes to the message body or existing headers, but it may add new headers. It also modifies the envelope recipient.

The redirect command performs an MTA-style “forward” — that is, what you get from a ‘.forward’ file using sendmail under UNIX. The address on the SMTP envelope is replaced with the one on the redirect command and the message is sent back out. Notice, that it differs from the MUA-style forward, which creates a new message with a different sender and message ID, wrapping the old message in a new one.

4.7.2 External Actions

(The information in this node may be obsolete or otherwise inaccurate. This message will disappear, once this node revised.)

GNU Mailutils is shipped with a set of external Sieve actions. These actions are compiled as loadable modules and must be required prior to use (see section Require Statement).

Action: moderator [:keep] [:address address(string)]   [:source sieve-file(string)]

Synopsis:

 
require "moderator"
moderator args;

Description:

This action is a moderator robot for Mailman-driven mail archives. A Mailman moderation request is a MIME message consisting of the following three parts:

N Content-Type Description
1 text/plain Introduction for the human reader.
2 message/rfc822 Original submission.
3 message/rfc822 Mailman control message.

Replying to part 3 (keeping the subject intact) instructs Mailman to discard the original submission.

Replying to part 3 while adding an `Approved:' header with the list password in it approves the submission.

The moderator action spawns an inferior Sieve machine and filters the original submission (part 2) through it. If the inferior machine marks the message as deleted, the action replies to the control message, thereby causing the submission to be discarded. The ‘From:’ address of the reply can be modified using :address tag. After discarding the message, moderator marks it as deleted, unless it is given :keep tag.

The argument of :source tag, if given, specifies the Sieve source file to be used on the message. If :tag is not present, moderator will create and use a copy of the existing Sieve machine.

The action checks the message structure: it will bail out if the message does not have exactly 3 MIME parts, or if parts 2 and 3 are not of ‘message/rfc822’ type. It is the responsibility of the caller to make sure the message is actually a valid Mailman moderation request (see the example below).


Example:

 
if allof(header :is "Sender" "mailman-bounces@gnu.org",
         header :is "X-List-Administrivia" "yes")
  {
     moderator :source "~/.sieve/mailman.sv";
  }
Action: pipe [:envelope] command(string)

Synopsis:

 
require "pipe";
if pipe args
  {
     …
  }

Description:

The pipe action sends executes a command specified by its argument and sends the entire message to its standard input. The command argument supplies the command line.

The envelope of the message is included, if the :envelope tag is given.


Example:

The example below uses the maidag utility (see section maidag) to forward the message to user ‘gray’ on the machine ‘mail.gnu.org’.

 
require "pipe";

pipe "/usr/sbin/maidag --url smtp://gray@mail.gnu.org"
Action: vacation [:days ndays(number)]   [:subject subject(string)]   [:aliases addrlist(string-list)]   [:addresses noreply-address(string-list)]   [:reply_regex expr(string)]   [:reply_prefix prefix(string)]   reply-text(string)

Syntax:

 
require "vacation";
vacation args;

Description:

The vacation action returns a message with reply-text to the sender. It is intended to inform the sender that the recipient is not currently reading his mail.

If the :subject tag is given, its argument sets the subject of the message. Otherwise, the subject is formed by prefixing original subject with ‘Re:’, or prefix, given with the :reply_prefix tag. Before prefixing, any original prefixes matching extended regular expression expr (:reply_regex tag) are stripped from the subject line. If :reply_regex is not specified, the default regexp is ‘^re: *’.

The :aliases tag instructs vacation to handle messages for any address in addrlist in the same manner as those received for the user's principal email.

Before processing, vacation compares the sender address with its address exclusion list. Elements of this list are extended case-insensitive regular expressions. If the sender address matches any of these expressions, the message will not be replied. The default exclusion list is:

 
    .*-REQUEST@.*
    .*-RELAY@.*
    .*-OWNER@.*
    ^OWNER-.*
    ^postmaster@.*
    ^UUCP@.*
    ^MAILER@.*
    ^MAILER-DAEMON@.*

New entries can be added to this list using :addresses tag.

The :days tag sets the reply interval. A reply is sent to each sender once in ndays days. GNU Sieve keeps track of sender addresses and dates in a DBM file ‘.vacation’ stored in the user's home directory. This tag is available only if Mailutils is compiled with DBM support.

4.8 GNU Extensions

This section summarizes the GNU extensions to the sieve language

  1. Multiline strings syntax

    GNU libmu_sieve understands the following multiline string syntax:

     
    text:[-][delimiter]
    ....
    delimiter
    

    The meaning of optional flags is the same as in shell “here document” construct: the dash strips all leading tab characters from the string body, thus allowing it to be indented in a natural fashion; delimiter introduces the new end-of-text delimiter instead of the default dot. If delimiter starts with a backslash, no preprocessing will be performed within a string.

  2. Handling of the require statement.
  3. header test

    The header takes an optional argument :mime, meaning to scan the headers from each part of a multipart message.

  4. size test

    The size test allows to omit the optional argument (:over|:under). In this case exact equality is assumed.

  5. envelope test

    The only value that can be meaningfully used as the first required argument of an envelope test is ‘from’. This limitation may disappear from the subsequent releases.

  6. fileinto action

    The fileinto action allows to specify permissions on the mailbox, in case it is created (see fileinto).

  7. Match type optional argument.

    Along with the usual :is, :matches and contains matching type, GNU sieve library understands :regex type. This matching type toggles POSIX Extended Regular Expression matching.

5. Reporting Bugs

Email bug reports to bug-mailutils@gnu.org.

As the purpose of bug reporting is to improve software, please be sure to include maximum information when reporting a bug. The information needed is:

The archives of bug-mailutils mailing list are available from http://mail.gnu.org/mailman/listinfo/bug-mailutils.

6. Getting News About GNU Mailutils

The two places to look for any news regarding GNU Mailutils are the Mailutils homepage at http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils, and the project page at http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/mailutils.

The updated versions of this manual are available online from http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils/manual.

7. Acknowledgement

In no particular order,

A. References

B. Date Input Formats

First, a quote:

Our units of temporal measurement, from seconds on up to months, are so complicated, asymmetrical and disjunctive so as to make coherent mental reckoning in time all but impossible. Indeed, had some tyrannical god contrived to enslave our minds to time, to make it all but impossible for us to escape subjection to sodden routines and unpleasant surprises, he could hardly have done better than handing down our present system. It is like a set of trapezoidal building blocks, with no vertical or horizontal surfaces, like a language in which the simplest thought demands ornate constructions, useless particles and lengthy circumlocutions. Unlike the more successful patterns of language and science, which enable us to face experience boldly or at least level-headedly, our system of temporal calculation silently and persistently encourages our terror of time.

… It is as though architects had to measure length in feet, width in meters and height in ells; as though basic instruction manuals demanded a knowledge of five different languages. It is no wonder then that we often look into our own immediate past or future, last Tuesday or a week from Sunday, with feelings of helpless confusion. …

— Robert Grudin, Time and the Art of Living.

This section describes the textual date representations that GNU programs accept. These are the strings you, as a user, can supply as arguments to the various programs. The C interface (via the get_date function) is not described here.

B.1 General date syntax

A date is a string, possibly empty, containing many items separated by whitespace. The whitespace may be omitted when no ambiguity arises. The empty string means the beginning of today (i.e., midnight). Order of the items is immaterial. A date string may contain many flavors of items:

We describe each of these item types in turn, below.

A few ordinal numbers may be written out in words in some contexts. This is most useful for specifying day of the week items or relative items (see below). Among the most commonly used ordinal numbers, the word ‘last’ stands for -1, ‘this’ stands for 0, and ‘first’ and ‘next’ both stand for 1. Because the word ‘second’ stands for the unit of time there is no way to write the ordinal number 2, but for convenience ‘third’ stands for 3, ‘fourth’ for 4, ‘fifth’ for 5, ‘sixth’ for 6, ‘seventh’ for 7, ‘eighth’ for 8, ‘ninth’ for 9, ‘tenth’ for 10, ‘eleventh’ for 11 and ‘twelfth’ for 12.

When a month is written this way, it is still considered to be written numerically, instead of being “spelled in full”; this changes the allowed strings.

In the current implementation, only English is supported for words and abbreviations like ‘AM’, ‘DST’, ‘EST’, ‘first’, ‘January’, ‘Sunday’, ‘tomorrow’, and ‘year’.

The output of the date command is not always acceptable as a date string, not only because of the language problem, but also because there is no standard meaning for time zone items like ‘IST’. When using date to generate a date string intended to be parsed later, specify a date format that is independent of language and that does not use time zone items other than ‘UTC’ and ‘Z’. Here are some ways to do this:

 
$ LC_ALL=C TZ=UTC0 date
Mon Mar  1 00:21:42 UTC 2004
$ TZ=UTC0 date +'%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%SZ'
2004-03-01 00:21:42Z
$ date --iso-8601=ns | tr T ' '  # --iso-8601 is a GNU extension.
2004-02-29 16:21:42,692722128-0800
$ date --rfc-2822  # a GNU extension
Sun, 29 Feb 2004 16:21:42 -0800
$ date +'%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S %z'  # %z is a GNU extension.
2004-02-29 16:21:42 -0800
$ date +'@%s.%N'  # %s and %N are GNU extensions.
@1078100502.692722128

Alphabetic case is completely ignored in dates. Comments may be introduced between round parentheses, as long as included parentheses are properly nested. Hyphens not followed by a digit are currently ignored. Leading zeros on numbers are ignored.

Invalid dates like ‘2005-02-29’ or times like ‘24:00’ are rejected. In the typical case of a host that does not support leap seconds, a time like ‘23:59:60’ is rejected even if it corresponds to a valid leap second.

B.2 Calendar date items

A calendar date item specifies a day of the year. It is specified differently, depending on whether the month is specified numerically or literally. All these strings specify the same calendar date:

 
1972-09-24     # ISO 8601.
72-9-24        # Assume 19xx for 69 through 99,
               # 20xx for 00 through 68.
72-09-24       # Leading zeros are ignored.
9/24/72        # Common U.S. writing.
24 September 1972
24 Sept 72     # September has a special abbreviation.
24 Sep 72      # Three-letter abbreviations always allowed.
Sep 24, 1972
24-sep-72
24sep72

The year can also be omitted. In this case, the last specified year is used, or the current year if none. For example:

 
9/24
sep 24

Here are the rules.

For numeric months, the ISO 8601 format ‘year-month-day’ is allowed, where year is any positive number, month is a number between 01 and 12, and day is a number between 01 and 31. A leading zero must be present if a number is less than ten. If year is 68 or smaller, then 2000 is added to it; otherwise, if year is less than 100, then 1900 is added to it. The construct ‘month/day/year’, popular in the United States, is accepted. Also ‘month/day’, omitting the year.

Literal months may be spelled out in full: ‘January’, ‘February’, ‘March’, ‘April’, ‘May’, ‘June’, ‘July’, ‘August’, ‘September’, ‘October’, ‘November’ or ‘December’. Literal months may be abbreviated to their first three letters, possibly followed by an abbreviating dot. It is also permitted to write ‘Sept’ instead of ‘September’.

When months are written literally, the calendar date may be given as any of the following:

 
day month year
day month
month day year
day-month-year

Or, omitting the year:

 
month day

B.3 Time of day items

A time of day item in date strings specifies the time on a given day. Here are some examples, all of which represent the same time:

 
20:02:00.000000
20:02
8:02pm
20:02-0500      # In EST (U.S. Eastern Standard Time).

More generally, the time of day may be given as ‘hour:minute:second’, where hour is a number between 0 and 23, minute is a number between 0 and 59, and second is a number between 0 and 59 possibly followed by ‘.’ or ‘,’ and a fraction containing one or more digits. Alternatively, ‘:second’ can be omitted, in which case it is taken to be zero. On the rare hosts that support leap seconds, second may be 60.

If the time is followed by ‘am’ or ‘pm’ (or ‘a.m.’ or ‘p.m.’), hour is restricted to run from 1 to 12, and ‘:minute’ may be omitted (taken to be zero). ‘am’ indicates the first half of the day, ‘pm’ indicates the second half of the day. In this notation, 12 is the predecessor of 1: midnight is ‘12am’ while noon is ‘12pm’. (This is the zero-oriented interpretation of ‘12am’ and ‘12pm’, as opposed to the old tradition derived from Latin which uses ‘12m’ for noon and ‘12pm’ for midnight.)

The time may alternatively be followed by a time zone correction, expressed as ‘shhmm’, where s is ‘+’ or ‘-’, hh is a number of zone hours and mm is a number of zone minutes. The zone minutes term, mm, may be omitted, in which case the one- or two-digit correction is interpreted as a number of hours. You can also separate hh from mm with a colon. When a time zone correction is given this way, it forces interpretation of the time relative to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), overriding any previous specification for the time zone or the local time zone. For example, ‘+0530’ and ‘+05:30’ both stand for the time zone 5.5 hours ahead of UTC (e.g., India). This is the best way to specify a time zone correction by fractional parts of an hour. The maximum zone correction is 24 hours.

Either ‘am’/‘pm’ or a time zone correction may be specified, but not both.

B.4 Time zone items

A time zone item specifies an international time zone, indicated by a small set of letters, e.g., ‘UTC’ or ‘Z’ for Coordinated Universal Time. Any included periods are ignored. By following a non-daylight-saving time zone by the string ‘DST’ in a separate word (that is, separated by some white space), the corresponding daylight saving time zone may be specified. Alternatively, a non-daylight-saving time zone can be followed by a time zone correction, to add the two values. This is normally done only for ‘UTC’; for example, ‘UTC+05:30’ is equivalent to ‘+05:30’.

Time zone items other than ‘UTC’ and ‘Z’ are obsolescent and are not recommended, because they are ambiguous; for example, ‘EST’ has a different meaning in Australia than in the United States. Instead, it's better to use unambiguous numeric time zone corrections like ‘-0500’, as described in the previous section.

If neither a time zone item nor a time zone correction is supplied, time stamps are interpreted using the rules of the default time zone (see section Specifying time zone rules).

B.5 Day of week items

The explicit mention of a day of the week will forward the date (only if necessary) to reach that day of the week in the future.

Days of the week may be spelled out in full: ‘Sunday’, ‘Monday’, ‘Tuesday’, ‘Wednesday’, ‘Thursday’, ‘Friday’ or ‘Saturday’. Days may be abbreviated to their first three letters, optionally followed by a period. The special abbreviations ‘Tues’ for ‘Tuesday’, ‘Wednes’ for ‘Wednesday’ and ‘Thur’ or ‘Thurs’ for ‘Thursday’ are also allowed.

A number may precede a day of the week item to move forward supplementary weeks. It is best used in expression like ‘third monday’. In this context, ‘last day’ or ‘next day’ is also acceptable; they move one week before or after the day that day by itself would represent.

A comma following a day of the week item is ignored.

B.6 Relative items in date strings

Relative items adjust a date (or the current date if none) forward or backward. The effects of relative items accumulate. Here are some examples:

 
1 year
1 year ago
3 years
2 days

The unit of time displacement may be selected by the string ‘year’ or ‘month’ for moving by whole years or months. These are fuzzy units, as years and months are not all of equal duration. More precise units are ‘fortnight’ which is worth 14 days, ‘week’ worth 7 days, ‘day’ worth 24 hours, ‘hour’ worth 60 minutes, ‘minute’ or ‘min’ worth 60 seconds, and ‘second’ or ‘sec’ worth one second. An ‘s’ suffix on these units is accepted and ignored.

The unit of time may be preceded by a multiplier, given as an optionally signed number. Unsigned numbers are taken as positively signed. No number at all implies 1 for a multiplier. Following a relative item by the string ‘ago’ is equivalent to preceding the unit by a multiplier with value -1.

The string ‘tomorrow’ is worth one day in the future (equivalent to ‘day’), the string ‘yesterday’ is worth one day in the past (equivalent to ‘day ago’).

The strings ‘now’ or ‘today’ are relative items corresponding to zero-valued time displacement, these strings come from the fact a zero-valued time displacement represents the current time when not otherwise changed by previous items. They may be used to stress other items, like in ‘12:00 today’. The string ‘this’ also has the meaning of a zero-valued time displacement, but is preferred in date strings like ‘this thursday’.

When a relative item causes the resulting date to cross a boundary where the clocks were adjusted, typically for daylight saving time, the resulting date and time are adjusted accordingly.

The fuzz in units can cause problems with relative items. For example, ‘2003-07-31 -1 month’ might evaluate to 2003-07-01, because 2003-06-31 is an invalid date. To determine the previous month more reliably, you can ask for the month before the 15th of the current month. For example:

 
$ date -R
Thu, 31 Jul 2003 13:02:39 -0700
$ date --date='-1 month' +'Last month was %B?'
Last month was July?
$ date --date="$(date +%Y-%m-15) -1 month" +'Last month was %B!'
Last month was June!

Also, take care when manipulating dates around clock changes such as daylight saving leaps. In a few cases these have added or subtracted as much as 24 hours from the clock, so it is often wise to adopt universal time by setting the TZ environment variable to ‘UTC0’ before embarking on calendrical calculations.

B.7 Pure numbers in date strings

The precise interpretation of a pure decimal number depends on the context in the date string.

If the decimal number is of the form yyyymmdd and no other calendar date item (see section Calendar date items) appears before it in the date string, then yyyy is read as the year, mm as the month number and dd as the day of the month, for the specified calendar date.

If the decimal number is of the form hhmm and no other time of day item appears before it in the date string, then hh is read as the hour of the day and mm as the minute of the hour, for the specified time of day. mm can also be omitted.

If both a calendar date and a time of day appear to the left of a number in the date string, but no relative item, then the number overrides the year.

B.8 Seconds since the Epoch

If you precede a number with ‘@’, it represents an internal time stamp as a count of seconds. The number can contain an internal decimal point (either ‘.’ or ‘,’); any excess precision not supported by the internal representation is truncated toward minus infinity. Such a number cannot be combined with any other date item, as it specifies a complete time stamp.

Internally, computer times are represented as a count of seconds since an epoch—a well-defined point of time. On GNU and POSIX systems, the epoch is 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC, so ‘@0’ represents this time, ‘@1’ represents 1970-01-01 00:00:01 UTC, and so forth. GNU and most other POSIX-compliant systems support such times as an extension to POSIX, using negative counts, so that ‘@-1’ represents 1969-12-31 23:59:59 UTC.

Traditional Unix systems count seconds with 32-bit two's-complement integers and can represent times from 1901-12-13 20:45:52 through 2038-01-19 03:14:07 UTC. More modern systems use 64-bit counts of seconds with nanosecond subcounts, and can represent all the times in the known lifetime of the universe to a resolution of 1 nanosecond.

On most hosts, these counts ignore the presence of leap seconds. For example, on most hosts ‘@915148799’ represents 1998-12-31 23:59:59 UTC, ‘@915148800’ represents 1999-01-01 00:00:00 UTC, and there is no way to represent the intervening leap second 1998-12-31 23:59:60 UTC.

B.9 Specifying time zone rules

Normally, dates are interpreted using the rules of the current time zone, which in turn are specified by the TZ environment variable, or by a system default if TZ is not set. To specify a different set of default time zone rules that apply just to one date, start the date with a string of the form ‘TZ="rule"’. The two quote characters (‘"’) must be present in the date, and any quotes or backslashes within rule must be escaped by a backslash.

For example, with the GNU date command you can answer the question “What time is it in New York when a Paris clock shows 6:30am on October 31, 2004?” by using a date beginning with ‘TZ="Europe/Paris"’ as shown in the following shell transcript:

 
$ export TZ="America/New_York"
$ date --date='TZ="Europe/Paris" 2004-10-31 06:30'
Sun Oct 31 01:30:00 EDT 2004

In this example, the ‘--date’ operand begins with its own TZ setting, so the rest of that operand is processed according to ‘Europe/Paris’ rules, treating the string ‘2004-10-31 06:30’ as if it were in Paris. However, since the output of the date command is processed according to the overall time zone rules, it uses New York time. (Paris was normally six hours ahead of New York in 2004, but this example refers to a brief Halloween period when the gap was five hours.)

A TZ value is a rule that typically names a location in the tz’ database. A recent catalog of location names appears in the TWiki Date and Time Gateway. A few non-GNU hosts require a colon before a location name in a TZ setting, e.g., ‘TZ=":America/New_York"’.

The ‘tz’ database includes a wide variety of locations ranging from ‘Arctic/Longyearbyen’ to ‘Antarctica/South_Pole’, but if you are at sea and have your own private time zone, or if you are using a non-GNU host that does not support the ‘tz’ database, you may need to use a POSIX rule instead. Simple POSIX rules like ‘UTC0’ specify a time zone without daylight saving time; other rules can specify simple daylight saving regimes. See (libc)TZ Variable section `Specifying the Time Zone with TZ' in The GNU C Library.

B.10 Authors of get_date

get_date was originally implemented by Steven M. Bellovin (smb@research.att.com) while at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. The code was later tweaked by a couple of people on Usenet, then completely overhauled by Rich $alz (rsalz@bbn.com) and Jim Berets (jberets@bbn.com) in August, 1990. Various revisions for the GNU system were made by David MacKenzie, Jim Meyering, Paul Eggert and others.

This chapter was originally produced by François Pinard (pinard@iro.umontreal.ca) from the ‘getdate.y’ source code, and then edited by K. Berry (kb@cs.umb.edu).

C. Configuring Help Summary

Running prog --help displays the short usage summary for prog utility (see section Options That are Common for All Utilities.). This summary is organized by groups of semantically close options. The options within each group are printed in the following order: a short option, eventually followed by a list of corresponding long option names, followed by a short description of the option. For example, here is an excerpt from the actual sieve --help output:

  -c, --compile-only         Compile script and exit
  -d, --debug[=FLAGS]        Debug flags
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address

The exact visual representation of the help output is configurable via ARGP_HELP_FMT environment variable. The value of this variable is a comma-separated list of format variable assignments. There are two kinds of format variables. An offset variable keeps the offset of some part of help output text from the leftmost column on the screen. A boolean variable is a flag that toggles some output feature on or off. Depending on the type of the corresponding variable, there are two kinds of assignments:

Offset assignment

The assignment to an offset variable has the following syntax:

 
variable=value

where variable is the variable name, and value is a numeric value to be assigned to the variable.

Boolean assignment

To assign true value to a variable, simply put this variable name. To assign false value, prefix the variable name with ‘no-’. For example:

 
# Assign true value:
dup-args
# Assign false value:
no-dup-args

Following variables are declared:

Help Output: boolean dup-args

If true, arguments for an option are shown with both short and long options, even when a given option has both forms, for example:

 
  -e ADDRESS, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address

If false, then if an option has both short and long forms, the argument is only shown with the long one, for example:

 
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address

and a message indicating that the argument is applicable to both forms is printed below the options. This message can be disabled using dup-args-note (see below).

The default is false.

Help Output: boolean dup-args-note

If this variable is true, which is the default, the following notice is displayed at the end of the help output:

Mandatory or optional arguments to long options are also mandatory or optional for any corresponding short options.

Setting no-dup-args-note inhibits this message. Normally, only one of variables dup-args or dup-args-note should be set.

Help Output: offset short-opt-col

Column in which short options start. Default is 2.

 
$ sieve --help|grep ADDRESS
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address
$ ARGP_HELP_FMT=short-opt-col=6 sieve --help|grep ARCHIVE
      -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address
Help Output: offset long-opt-col

Column in which long options start. Default is 6. For example:

 
$ sieve --help|grep ADDRESS
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address
$ ARGP_HELP_FMT=long-opt-col=16 sieve --help|grep ADDRESS
  -e,           --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address
Help Output: offset doc-opt-col

Column in which doc options start. A doc option isn't actually an option, but rather an arbitrary piece of documentation that is displayed in much the same manner as the options. For example, in the output of folder --help:

Usage: folder [OPTION...] [action] [msg]
GNU MH folder
  Actions are:
      --list                 List the contents of the folder stack
  ...

the string ‘Actions are:’ is a doc option. Thus, if you set ARGP_HELP_FMT=doc-opt-col=6 the above part of the help output will look as follows:

Usage: folder [OPTION...] [action] [msg]
GNU MH folder
      Actions are:
      --list                 List the contents of the folder stack
  ...
Help Output: offset opt-doc-col

Column in which option description starts. Default is 29.

 
$ sieve --help|grep ADDRESS
  -e, --email=ADDRESS        Override user email address
$ ARGP_HELP_FMT=opt-doc-col=19 sieve --help|grep ADDRESS
  -e, --email=ADDRESS   Override user email address
$ ARGP_HELP_FMT=opt-doc-col=9 sieve --help|grep -i ADDRESS
  -e, --email=ADDRESS
         Override user email address

Notice, that the description starts on a separate line if opt-doc-col value is too small.

Help Output: offset header-col

Column in which group headers are printed. A group header is a descriptive text preceding an option group. For example, in the following text:

 Sieve options
  -I, --includedir=DIR       Append directory DIR to the
                             list of include directories

the text ‘Sieve options’ is a group header.

The default value is 1.

Help Output: offset usage-indent

Indentation of wrapped usage lines. Affects ‘--usage’ output. Default is 12.

Help Output: offset rmargin

Right margin of the text output. Used for wrapping.

D. GNU Free Documentation License

Version 1.2, November 2002

 
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2010 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
  1. PREAMBLE

    The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

    This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.

    We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.

  2. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

    This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.

    A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

    A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.

    The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.

    The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.

    A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

    Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.

    The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

    A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.

    The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  3. VERBATIM COPYING

    You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.

    You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.

  4. COPYING IN QUANTITY

    If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

    If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.

    If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

    It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.

  5. MODIFICATIONS

    You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:

    1. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
    2. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
    3. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
    4. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
    5. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
    6. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
    7. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
    8. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
    9. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
    10. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
    11. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
    12. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
    13. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
    14. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
    15. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

    If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.

    You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.

    You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.

    The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  6. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

    You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.

    The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.

    In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  7. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

    You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.

    You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.

  8. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

    A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

    If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.

  9. TRANSLATION

    Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.

    If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.

  10. TERMINATION

    You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  11. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

    The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.

    Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.

D.1 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:

 
  Copyright (C)  year  your name.
  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
  under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
  or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
  with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
  Free Documentation License''.

If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:

 
    with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with
    the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts
    being list.

If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.

If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.

Function Index

This is an alphabetical list of all Mailutils functions.

Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   Y  
Index Entry Section
A
aclDescription
address4.6.1 Built-in Tests
ago in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
allowDescription
allow-biffrc2.14.2.1 General Settings
allow-syslog-priority2.2.10 Description
allow-table2.2.10 Description
am in date stringsB.3 Time of day items
authDescription
authenticationDescription
authorizationDescription
B
bulletin-db2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
bulletin-source2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
C
clear-include-pathSieve Configuration
clear-library-pathSieve Configuration
concat2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
config-file, --config-file option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
config-file, --config-file option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
config-help, --config-help option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
config-help, --config-help option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
config-lint, --config-lint option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
config-lint, --config-lint option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
config-verbose, --config-verbose option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
config-verbose, --config-verbose option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
create-home-dir2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
D
daemon2.2.10 Description
day in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
day in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
db2.2.17 Description
debugSieve Configuration
debug2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
debug2.11.2 Mimeview Config
decode2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
delete-expired2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
denyDescription
deny-syslog-priority2.2.10 Description
deny-table2.2.10 Description
directoryDescription
discard4.7.1 Built-in Actions
E
emacs2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
emailSieve Configuration
enable2.2.10 Description
envelope4.6.1 Built-in Tests
ex-multiple-delivery-success2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
ex-quota-tempfail2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
execDescription
exists4.6.1 Built-in Tests
expire2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
expire-timeoutDescription
external-lockerDescription
F
facilityDescription
false4.6.1 Built-in Tests
fileinto4.7.1 Built-in Actions
first in date stringsB.1 General date syntax
flagsDescription
folderDescription
folder2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
foregroundDescription
form-feeds2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
fortnight in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
forward-file2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
forward-file-checks2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
G
get_dateB. Date Input Formats
getpwnamDescription
getpwuidDescription
group2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
guile-filter2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
H
header2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
header4.6.1 Built-in Tests
help, --help option, described2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
home-dir-mode2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
host2.2.17 Description
hour in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
I
id-fields2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
ident-encrypt-only2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
ident-keyfile2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
ifexecDescription
ignore-erros2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
in_reply_to2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
include-pathSieve Configuration
int3.1.9 Stream
interface2.2.17 Description
isreply2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
K
keep4.7.1 Built-in Actions
keep-goingSieve Configuration
L
last dayB.5 Day of week items
last in date stringsB.1 General date syntax
levelDescription
library-pathSieve Configuration
line-infoDescription
line-infoSieve Configuration
list4.6.2 External Tests
listen2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
lmtp2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
logDescription
login-delay2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
login-disabled2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
M
mail-spoolDescription
mailbox-ownership2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
mailbox-patternDescription
mailbox-typeDescription
max-childrenDescription
max-lines2.14.2.1 General Settings
max-requests2.14.2.2 Security Settings
mbox-urlSieve Configuration
message-id-header2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
metamail2.11.2 Mimeview Config
midnight in date stringsB.3 Time of day items
mimetypes2.11.2 Mimeview Config
minute in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
modeDescription
moderator4.7.2 External Actions
month in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
mu-address-get-comments3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-address-get-count3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-address-get-domain3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-address-get-email3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-address-get-local3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-address-get-personal3.3.1 Address Functions
mu-body-read-line3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-body-write3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-closelog3.3.5 Logging Functions
mu-folder-directory3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-logger3.3.5 Logging Functions
mu-mail-directory3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-append-message3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-close3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-expunge3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-get-message3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-get-port3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-get-url3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-messages-count3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-mailbox-open3.3.2 Mailbox Functions
mu-message-copy3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-create3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-delete3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-destroy3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-body3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-flag3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-header3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-header-fields3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-lines3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-num-parts3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-part3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-port3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-sender3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-size3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-uid3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-get-user-flag3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-multipart?3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-send3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-set-flag3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-set-header3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-set-header-fields3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-message-set-user-flag3.3.3 Message Functions
mu-mime-add-part3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-mime-create3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-mime-get-message3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-mime-get-num-parts3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-mime-get-part3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-mime-multipart?3.3.4 MIME Functions
mu-openlog3.3.5 Logging Functions
mu-register-format3.3.6 Other Functions
mu-strerror3.3.6 Other Functions
mu-username->email3.3.1 Address Functions
mu_address_aget_domain3.1.12 Address
mu_address_aget_email3.1.12 Address
mu_address_aget_local_part3.1.12 Address
mu_address_aget_personal3.1.12 Address
mu_address_contains_email3.1.12 Address
mu_address_create3.1.12 Address
mu_address_createv3.1.12 Address
mu_address_destroy3.1.12 Address
mu_address_format_string3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_comments3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_count3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_domain3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_email3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_email_count3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_group_count3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_local_part3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_nth3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_personal3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_route3.1.12 Address
mu_address_get_unix_mailbox_count3.1.12 Address
mu_address_is_group3.1.12 Address
mu_address_t3.1.12 Address
mu_address_to_string3.1.12 Address
mu_address_union3.1.12 Address
mu_attribute_clear_modified3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_copy3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_create3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_destroy3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_get_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_get_owner3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_answered3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_deleted3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_draft3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_equal3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_flagged3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_modified3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_read3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_recent3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_seen3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_is_userflag3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_answered3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_deleted3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_draft3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_flagged3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_get_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_modified3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_read3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_recent3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_seen3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_set_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_unset_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_set_userflag3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_to_string3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_answered3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_deleted3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_draft3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_flagged3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_flags3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_read3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_recent3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_seen3.1.8 Attribute
mu_attribute_unset_userflag3.1.8 Attribute
mu_auth_data3.2.1 Data Types
mu_auth_data_alloc3.2.3 Module Creation and Destruction
mu_auth_data_free3.2.3 Module Creation and Destruction
mu_auth_fp3.2.1 Data Types
mu_auth_init3.2.2 Initializing ‘libmu_auth
mu_auth_module3.2.1 Data Types
mu_auth_nosupport3.2.5 Existing Modules
MU_AUTH_REGISTER_ALL_MODULES3.2.2 Initializing ‘libmu_auth
mu_auth_register_module3.2.3 Module Creation and Destruction
mu_auth_runlist3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information
mu_authenticate3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information
mu_authority_authenticate3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_create3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_create_null3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_destroy3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_get_owner3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_get_ticket3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_set_authenticate3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_authority_set_ticket3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_body_clear_modified3.1.7 Body
mu_body_create3.1.7 Body
mu_body_destroy3.1.7 Body
mu_body_get_filename3.1.7 Body
mu_body_get_owner3.1.7 Body
mu_body_get_stream3.1.7 Body
mu_body_is_modified3.1.7 Body
mu_body_lines3.1.7 Body
mu_body_set_lines3.1.7 Body
mu_body_set_size3.1.7 Body
mu_body_set_stream3.1.7 Body
mu_body_size3.1.7 Body
mu_decoder_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_encoder_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_envelope_create3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_date3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_destroy3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_get_owner3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_sender3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_set_date3.1.5 Envelope
mu_envelope_set_sender3.1.5 Envelope
mu_file_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_filter_prog_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_folder_close3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_create3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_delete3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_destroy3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_get_authority3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_get_debug3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_get_observable3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_get_stream3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_get_url3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_has_debug3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_list3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_lsub3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_open3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_rename3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_set_authority3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_set_debug3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_set_stream3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_set_url3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_subscribe3.1.1 Folder
mu_folder_unsubscribe3.1.1 Folder
mu_get_auth_by_name3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information
mu_get_auth_by_uid3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information
mu_header_aget_field_name3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_aget_field_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_aget_field_value_unfold3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_aget_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_aget_value_unfold3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_clear_modified3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_create3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_destroy3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_address3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_field_count3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_field_name3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_field_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_field_value_unfold3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_owner3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_stream3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_get_value_unfold3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_is_modified3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_lines3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_fill3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_get_fvalue3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_get_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_lines3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_set_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_size3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_stream3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_set_value3.1.6 Headers
mu_header_size3.1.6 Headers
mu_iterator_advance3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_attach3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_create3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_current3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_destroy3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_detach3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_dup3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_first3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_is_done3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_next3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_curitem_p3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_destroy3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_dup3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_finished_p3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_first3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_getitem3.1.10 Iterator
mu_iterator_set_next3.1.10 Iterator
mu_locker_create3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_destroy3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_get_expire_time3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_get_external3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_get_flags3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_get_retries3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_get_retry_sleep3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_lock3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_remove_lock3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_default_expire_timeout3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_default_external_program3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_default_flags3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_default_retry_count3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_default_retry_timeout3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_expire_time3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_external3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_flags3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_retries3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_set_retry_sleep3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_touchlock3.1.13 Locker
mu_locker_unlock3.1.13 Locker
mu_mailbox_append_message3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_close3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_create3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_create_default3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_destroy3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_expunge3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_flush3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_debug3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_folder3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_locker3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_message3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_observable3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_property3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_size3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_stream3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_get_url3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_has_debug3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_is_updated3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_lock3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_message_unseen3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_messages_count3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_messages_recent3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_open3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_save_attributes3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_scan3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_set_debug3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_set_folder3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_set_locker3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_set_stream3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_t3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_uidnext3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_uidvalidity3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailbox_unlock3.1.2 Mailbox
mu_mailcap_createAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_destroyAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entries_countAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_copiousoutputAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_fields_countAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_composeAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_composetypedAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_descriptionAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_editAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_fieldAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_nametemplateAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_notesAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_testAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_textualnewlinesAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_typefieldAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_valueAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_viewcommandAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_get_x11bitmapAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_entry_needsterminalAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_get_entryAn Example of Parsing a Mailcap File:
mu_mailcap_t,3.1.16 Mailcap
mu_mailer_check_from3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_check_to3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_close3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_create3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_destroy3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_get_debug3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_get_observable3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_get_property3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_get_stream3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_get_url3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_open3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_send_message3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_set_debug3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mailer_set_stream3.1.3 Mailer
mu_mapfile_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_memory_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_message_aget_attachment_name3.1.4 Message
mu_message_clear_modified3.1.4 Message
mu_message_create3.1.4 Message
mu_message_create_attachment3.1.4 Message
mu_message_create_copy3.1.4 Message
mu_message_destroy3.1.4 Message
mu_message_encapsulate3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_attachment_name3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_attribute3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_body3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_envelope3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_header3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_mailbox3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_num_parts3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_observable3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_owner3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_part3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_stream3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_uid3.1.4 Message
mu_message_get_uidl3.1.4 Message
mu_message_is_modified3.1.4 Message
mu_message_is_multipart3.1.4 Message
mu_message_lines3.1.4 Message
mu_message_ref3.1.4 Message
mu_message_save_attachment3.1.4 Message
mu_message_save_to_mailbox3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_attribute3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_body3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_envelope3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_get_num_parts3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_get_part3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_header3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_is_multipart3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_lines3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_mailbox3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_size3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_stream3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_uid3.1.4 Message
mu_message_set_uidl3.1.4 Message
mu_message_size3.1.4 Message
mu_message_unencapsulate3.1.4 Message
mu_parse822_addr_spec3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_address3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_address_list3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_atom3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_comment3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_d_text3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_date3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_date_time3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_day3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_digits3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_domain3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_domain_literal3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_domain_ref3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_field_body3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_field_name3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_group3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_atom_char3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_char3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_ctl3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_d_text3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_digit3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_htab3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_lwsp_char3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_q_text3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_smtp_q3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_space3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_is_special3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_local_part3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_mail_box3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_phrase3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_quote_local_part3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_quote_string3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_quoted_pair3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_quoted_string3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_route3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_route_addr3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_skip_comments3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_skip_crlf3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_skip_lwsp3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_skip_lwsp_char3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_skip_nl3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_special3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_sub_domain3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_time3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_unix_mbox3.1.15 Parse822
mu_parse822_word3.1.15 Parse822
mu_prog_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_sieve_abort3.4.3 Logging and Diagnostic Functions
mu_sieve_action_log_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_action_lookup3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_comparator_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_compile3.4.6 Compiling and Executing the Script
mu_sieve_data_type3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_debug3.4.3 Logging and Diagnostic Functions
mu_sieve_destructor_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_disass3.4.6 Compiling and Executing the Script
mu_sieve_error3.4.3 Logging and Diagnostic Functions
mu_sieve_get_daemon_email3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_data3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_debug_level3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_locus3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_mailer3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_message3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_message_num3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_get_ticket3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_handler_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_is_dry_run3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_load_ext3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_locus_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_log_action3.4.3 Logging and Diagnostic Functions
mu_sieve_machine_add_destructor3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_machine_destroy3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_machine_init3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_mailbox3.4.6 Compiling and Executing the Script
mu_sieve_malloc3.4.5 Memory Allocation
mu_sieve_message3.4.6 Compiling and Executing the Script
mu_sieve_mfree3.4.5 Memory Allocation
mu_sieve_mrealloc3.4.5 Memory Allocation
mu_sieve_mstrdup3.4.5 Memory Allocation
mu_sieve_parse_error_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_printf_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_register_action3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_register_comparator3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_register_test3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_relcmp_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_relcmpn_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_retrieve_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_runtime_tag_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_set_daemon_email3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_debug3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_debug_level3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_error3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_logger3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_mailer3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_parse_error3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_set_ticket3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_tag_checker_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_tag_def_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_sieve_tag_lookup3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_test_lookup3.4.4 Symbol Space Functions
mu_sieve_type_str3.4.2 Manipulating the Sieve Machine
mu_sieve_value_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
mu_stdio_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_ALLOW_LINKS3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_APPEND3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_close3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_CREAT3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_destroy3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_flush3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_fd3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_fd23.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_flags3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_owner3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_property3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_get_state3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_is_seekable3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_NO_CHECK3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_NO_CLOSE3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_NONBLOCK3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_open3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_RDWR3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_read3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_READ3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_readline3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_seek3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_SEEKABLE3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_sequential_readline3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_sequential_write3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_close3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_destroy3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_fd3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_flags3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_flush3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_open3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_owner3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_property3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_read3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_readline3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_size3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_strerror3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_truncate3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_set_write3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_setbufsiz3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_size3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_strerror3.1.9 Stream
MU_STREAM_WRITE3.1.9 Stream
mu_stream_write3.1.9 Stream
mu_tcp_stream_create3.1.9 Stream
mu_ticket_create3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_destroy3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_get_data3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_get_owner3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_pop3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_set_data3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_set_destroy3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_ticket_set_pop3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_url_createURL Functions
mu_url_decodeURL Functions
mu_url_destroyURL Functions
mu_url_get_authURL Functions
mu_url_get_hostURL Functions
mu_url_get_passwdURL Functions
mu_url_get_pathURL Functions
mu_url_get_portURL Functions
mu_url_get_queryURL Functions
mu_url_get_schemeURL Functions
mu_url_get_userURL Functions
mu_url_is_same_hostURL Functions
mu_url_is_same_pathURL Functions
mu_url_is_same_portURL Functions
mu_url_is_same_schemeURL Functions
mu_url_is_same_userURL Functions
mu_url_is_schemeURL Functions
mu_url_is_ticketURL Functions
mu_url_parseURL Functions
mu_url_to_stringURL Functions
mu_wicket_create3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_wicket_destroy3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_wicket_get_filename3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_wicket_get_ticket3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_wicket_set_filename3.1.11 Authenticator
mu_wicket_set_ticket3.1.11 Authenticator
N
next dayB.5 Day of week items
next in date stringsB.1 General date syntax
no-header2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
no-site-config, --no-site-config option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
no-site-config, --no-site-config option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
no-user-config, --no-user-config option, described2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
no-user-config, --no-user-config option, introduced2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
noon in date stringsB.3 Time of day items
now in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
numaddr4.6.2 External Tests
O
other-mailbox-mode2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
other-namespace2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
overflow-control-interval2.14.2.2 Security Settings
overflow-delay-time2.14.2.2 Security Settings
P
package2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
package_string2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
passwd2.2.17 Description
passwd-dirDescription
pidfileDescription
pipe4.7.2 External Actions
pm in date stringsB.3 Time of day items
portDescription
port2.2.17 Description
preauth2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
preauth-only2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
preserve2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
printhdr2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
program-id2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
Q
quota-db2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
R
rcpt2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
redirect4.7.1 Built-in Actions
references2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
reject4.7.1 Built-in Actions
reply_regex2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
request-control-interval2.14.2.2 Security Settings
retry-countDescription
retry-timeoutDescription
reuse-address2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
reverse2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
S
serviceDescription
shared-mailbox-mode2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
shared-namespace2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
show-all-match2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
show-config-options, --show-config-options option, described2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
sieveSieve Configuration
sieve-filter2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
sieve_machine_t3.4.1 Sieve Data Types
single-processDescription
size4.6.1 Built-in Tests
spamd4.6.2 External Tests
stat-file2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
stderr2.10.9 Maidag Configuration File Summary
stop4.7.1 Built-in Actions
string_to_flags3.1.8 Attribute
T
tagDescription
this in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
ticketSieve Configuration
timeoutDescription
timeoutDescription
timestamp4.6.2 External Tests
tls-required2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
tls-required2.13.2 Configuration of imap4d.
today in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
tomorrow in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
transcriptDescription
true4.6.1 Built-in Tests
U
uidl2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
undelete2.12.4 Pop3d Configuration
unre2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
urlDescription
usage, --usage option, described2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
user2.2.17 Description
V
vacation4.7.2 External Actions
verbose2.6.1 Movemail Configuration
verboseSieve Configuration
version2.15.1.1 New and Differing MH Format Specifications
version, --version option, described2.1.2 Options That are Common for All Utilities.
W
weedlist2.7.2 Configuration of readmsg.
week in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
Y
year in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
yesterday in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   Y  

Variable Index

Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   X  
Index Entry Section
A
append, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
append, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
appenddeadletter, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
ARGP_HELP_FMT, environment variableC. Configuring Help Summary
askbcc, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
askcc, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
asksub, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
autoinc, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
autoprint, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
B
bang, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
byname, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
C
charset, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
cmd, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
columns, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
crt, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
D
datefield, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
debug, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
debug, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
decode-fallback, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
doc-opt-colC. Configuring Help Summary
dot, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
dup-argsC. Configuring Help Summary
dup-args-noteC. Configuring Help Summary
E
editheaders, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
emptystart, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
escape, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
F
flipr, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
folder, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
H
header, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
header-colC. Configuring Help Summary
hold, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
I
ignore, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
ignoreeof, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
indentprefix, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
K
keepsave, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
L
LD_LIBRARY_PATH4.4 Require Statement
long-opt-colC. Configuring Help Summary
LTDL_LIBRARY_PATH4.4 Require Statement
M
mailx, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
metamail, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
metoo, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
mimenoask, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
mode, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
mu_auth_generic_module3.2.5 Existing Modules
mu_auth_pam_module3.2.5 Existing Modules
mu_auth_sql_module3.2.5 Existing Modules
mu_auth_system_module3.2.5 Existing Modules
mu_auth_virtual_module3.2.5 Existing Modules
MU_DEFAULT_SCHEMEDescription
N
nullbody, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
nullbodymsg2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
O
onehop, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
opt-doc-colC. Configuring Help Summary
outfolder, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
P
page, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
prompt, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Q
quiet, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
quit, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
R
rc, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
readonly, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
record, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
regex, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
replyprefix, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
replyregex, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
rmarginC. Configuring Help Summary
S
save, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
screen, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
sendmail, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
sendwait, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
short-opt-colC. Configuring Help Summary
showto, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
showto, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Sign, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
sign, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
string2.15.1.2 New MH Profile Variables
string2.15.1.2 New MH Profile Variables
subject, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
T
toplines, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
TZB.9 Specifying time zone rules
U
usage-indentC. Configuring Help Summary
V
verbose, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
X
xmailer, mail variable2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   X  

Keyword Index

Jump to:   !   #   :   =   ?   |   ~  
A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Z  
Index Entry Section
!
!, mail commandShell Escapes
#
#include, sieveSieve #include directive
#searchpath, sieveSieve #searchpath directive
:
:all, sieve4.6 Tests
:comparator, sieve4.6 Tests
:contains, sieve4.6 Tests
:count, sieve4.6 Tests
:domain, sieve4.6 Tests
:is, sieve4.6 Tests
:localpart, sieve4.6 Tests
:matches, sieve4.6 Tests
:mime4.6.1 Built-in Tests
:over4.6.1 Built-in Tests
:over4.6.2 External Tests
:regex, sieve4.6 Tests
:under4.6.1 Built-in Tests
:under4.6.2 External Tests
:value, sieve4.6 Tests
=
=, mail commandDisplaying Information
?
?, mail commandObtaining Online Help
|
|, mail commandDisplaying Messages
~
~!, mail escapeExecuting Shell Commands: ~! and ~|
~-, mail escapeExecuting Other Mail Commands: ~: and ~-
~., mail escapeQuitting Compose Mode
~:, mail escapeExecuting Other Mail Commands: ~: and ~-
~?, mail escapeGetting Help on Compose Escapes: ~?
~A, mail escapeSigning the Message: ~a and ~A
~a, mail escapeSigning the Message: ~a and ~A
~e, mail escapeEditing the Message: ~e and ~v
~f, mail escapePrinting Another Message: ~f and ~F
~F, mail escapePrinting Another Message: ~f and ~F
~i, mail escapeInserting Value of a Mail Variable: ~i
~m, mail escapeEnclosing Another Message: ~m and ~M
~M, mail escapeEnclosing Another Message: ~m and ~M
~p, mail escapePrinting And Saving the Message
~v, mail escapeEditing the Message: ~e and ~v
~w, mail escapePrinting And Saving the Message
~x, mail escapeQuitting Compose Mode
~|, mail escapeExecuting Shell Commands: ~! and ~|
A
acl2.2.8 ACL Statement
alias, mail commandAliasing
all, sieve4.6 Tests
allof4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
alternates, mail commandAliasing
and, sieve4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
anyDescription
anyof4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
append2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
appenddeadletter2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
askbcc2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
askcc2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
asksub2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
auth2.2.12 Auth Statement
autoinc2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
autoprint2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
B
bang2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
byname2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
C
charset2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
chdir, mail commandChanging Mailbox/Directory
cmd2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
columns2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
comparator, sieve4.6 Tests
contains, sieve4.6 Tests
Copy, mail commandSaving Messages
copy, mail commandSaving Messages
count, sieve4.6 Tests
crt2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
D
datefield2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
debug2.2.4 Debug Statement
debug2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
debug2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
decode, mail commandDisplaying Messages
decode-fallback2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
delete, mail commandDisposing of Messages
discard, mail commandControlling Header Display
domain, sieve4.6 Tests
dot2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
dp, mail commandDisposing of Messages
dt, mail commandDisposing of Messages
E
echo, mail commandDisplaying Arbitrary Text
edit, mail commandEditing Messages
editheaders2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
else, mail commandConditional Statements
emptystart2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
endif, mail commandConditional Statements
escape2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
F
file, mail commandChanging Mailbox/Directory
flipr2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
folder2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
folder, mail commandChanging Mailbox/Directory
folders, mail commandDisplaying Information
followup, mail commandReplying
Followup, mail commandReplying
forward-file2.10.6 Forwarding
forward-file-checks2.10.6 Forwarding
from, mail commandDisplaying Information
fromfield2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
G
GNU-MU-DirDescription
GNU-MU-GECOSDescription
GNU-MU-GIDDescription
GNU-MU-MailboxDescription
GNU-MU-QuotaDescription
GNU-MU-ShellDescription
GNU-MU-UIDDescription
GNU-MU-User-NameDescription
group, mail commandAliasing
gsasl2.2.20 GSASL Statement
H
header2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
headers, mail commandDisplaying Information
headline2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
help, mail commandObtaining Online Help
hold2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
hold, mail commandMarking Messages
I
if, mail commandConditional Statements
if, sieve4.2.3 Control Flow
ignore2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
ignore, mail commandControlling Header Display
ignoreeof2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
include2.2.2 Include Statement
incorporate, mail commandIncorporating New Mail
indentprefix2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
inplacealiases2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
is, sieve4.6 Tests
K
keep2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
keepsave2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
L
ldap2.2.18 LDAP Statement
list, mail commandObtaining Online Help
localpart, sieve4.6 Tests
locking2.2.6 Locking Statement
logging2.2.3 Logging Statement
M
mail, mail commandReplying
mailbox2.2.5 Mailbox Statement
mailer2.2.7 Mailer Statement
mailx2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
matches, sieve4.6 Tests
mbox, mail commandSaving Messages
metamail2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
metoo2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
mimenoask2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
mode2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
N
next, mail commandMoving Within a Mailbox
nosender, mail commandControlling Sender Fields
not, sieve4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
nullbody2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
nullbodymsg2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
O
onehop2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
or, sieve4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
outfolder2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
P
page2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
pam2.2.13 PAM Statement
paramDescription
pipe, mail commandDisplaying Messages
preserve, mail commandMarking Messages
prev, mail commandMoving Within a Mailbox
print, mail commandDisplaying Messages
Print, mail commandDisplaying Messages
prompt2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Q
quiet2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
quit2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
R
radius2.2.15 Radius Statement
rc2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
readonly2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
record2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
recursivealiases2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
regex2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
regex, sieve4.6 Tests
reply, mail commandReplying
Reply, mail commandReplying
replyprefix2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
replyregex2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
require, sieve4.4 Require Statement
Respond, mail commandReplying
respond, mail commandReplying
retain, mail commandControlling Header Display
S
save2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Save, mail commandSaving Messages
save, mail commandSaving Messages
screen2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
script2.10.5.1 Sieve Maidag Filters
script2.10.5.2 Scheme Maidag Filters
script2.10.5.3 Python Maidag Filters
sender, mail commandControlling Sender Fields
sendmail2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
sendwait2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
server2.2.11.2 Server Statement
set, mail commandSetting and Unsetting the Variables
shell, mail commandShell Escapes
showenvelope2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
showto2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
showto2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
sign2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Sign2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
size, mail commandDisplaying Information
source, mail commandSourcing External Command Files
sql2.2.16 SQL Statement
struct, mail commandDisplaying Messages
subject2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
summary, mail commandDisplaying Information
T
tag, mail commandMarking Messages
tcp-wrappers2.2.9 Tcp-wrappers Statement
text:Lexical Tokens
tls2.2.19 TLS Statement
top, mail commandDisplaying Messages
toplines2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
touch, mail commandSaving Messages
typeDescription
type, mail commandDisplaying Messages
Type, mail commandDisplaying Messages
U
unalias, mail commandAliasing
undelete, mail commandDisposing of Messages
unset, mail commandSetting and Unsetting the Variables
userDescription
V
value, sieve4.6 Tests
variable, mail commandSetting and Unsetting the Variables
variable-pretty-print2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
variable-strict2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
verbose2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
version, mail commandObtaining Online Help
virtdomain2.2.14 Virtdomain Statement
visual, mail commandEditing Messages
W
warranty, mail commandObtaining Online Help
Write, mail commandSaving Messages
write, mail commandSaving Messages
X
xmailer2.4.6 How to Alter the Behavior of mail
Z
z, mail commandDisplaying Information
Jump to:   !   #   :   =   ?   |   ~  
A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Z  

Program Index

Jump to:   C   F   G   I   M   P   R   S  
Index Entry Section
C
comsatd2.14 Comsat Daemon
F
frmfrm
fromfrom
G
guimb2.9 guimb — A Mailbox Scanning and Processing Language
I
imap4d2.13 IMAP4 Daemon
M
maidag2.10 maidag
mail2.4 mail — Send and Receive Mail
mailutils-config2.16 mailutils-config — Get the Information about the Mailutils Build
messages2.5 messages — Count the Number of Messages in a Mailbox
mimeview2.11 mimeview
movemail2.6 movemail — Moves Mail from the User Maildrop to the Local File
P
pop3d2.12 POP3 Daemon
R
readmsg2.7 readmsg — Extract Messages from a Folder
S
sieve2.8 sieve
Jump to:   C   F   G   I   M   P   R   S  

Concept Index

This is a general index of all issues discussed in this manual

Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U  
Index Entry Section
A
abbreviations for monthsB.2 Calendar date items
action, sieve4.2.2 Actions Described
Address3.1.12 Address
Attribute3.1.8 Attribute
authentication2.2.12 Auth Statement
Authentication Library3.2 Authentication Library
Authenticator3.1.11 Authenticator
authorization2.2.12 Auth Statement
authors of get_dateB.10 Authors of get_date
B
beginning of time, for POSIXB.8 Seconds since the Epoch
Bellovin, Steven M.B.10 Authors of get_date
Berets, JimB.10 Authors of get_date
Berry, K.B.10 Authors of get_date
block statement, configuration file2.2.1.3 Block Statements
Body3.1.7 Body
boolean value2.2.1.2 Statements
C
calendar date itemB.2 Calendar date items
case, ignored in datesB.1 General date syntax
comments, configuration file2.2.1.1 Comments
comments, in datesB.1 General date syntax
comments, multi-line2.2.1.1 Comments
comments, single-line2.2.1.1 Comments
comparator, sieve4.5 Comparators
condition, sieve4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
configuration file statements2.2.1.2 Statements
configuring servers2.2.11 Server Settings
D
daemon, server modeDescription
date format, ISO 8601B.2 Calendar date items
date input formatsB. Date Input Formats
day of week itemB.5 Day of week items
direct indexingDescription
directory indexingDescription
displacement of datesB.6 Relative items in date strings
E
Eggert, PaulB.10 Authors of get_date
Envelope3.1.5 Envelope
epoch, for POSIXB.8 Seconds since the Epoch
escape sequence2.2.1.2 Statements
Exim2.10.2 Using maidag with Exim.
F
FDL, GNU Free Documentation LicenseD. GNU Free Documentation License
Folder3.1.1 Folder
forward2.10.6 Forwarding
Framework3.1 Framework
G
general date syntaxB.1 General date syntax
H
hashed indexingDescription
Headers3.1.6 Headers
here-document2.2.1.2 Statements
I
IMAP4 namespace2.13.1 Namespace
include statement, configuration file2.2.2 Include Statement
indexing, directDescription
indexing, hashedDescription
indexing, reverseDescription
inetd, server modeDescription
ISO 8601 date formatB.2 Calendar date items
items in date stringsB.1 General date syntax
Iterator3.1.10 Iterator
L
language, in datesB.1 General date syntax
language, in datesB.1 General date syntax
libmu_auth3.2 Authentication Library
libmu_auth modules3.2.5 Existing Modules
libmu_auth, data types3.2.1 Data Types
libmu_auth, linking with3.2.6 Using ‘libmu_auth’ in Your Programs
libmu_auth, obtaining authorization information3.2.4 Obtaining Authorization Information
libmu_scm3.3 Mailutils to Scheme Interface
libmu_sieve3.4 Sieve Library
Libraries3. Mailutils Libraries
Linking with ‘libmu_auth3.2.6 Using ‘libmu_auth’ in Your Programs
list2.2.1.2 Statements
LMTP2.10.3 Using maidag with MeTA1.
Locker3.1.13 Locker
M
MacKenzie, DavidB.10 Authors of get_date
Mailbox3.1.2 Mailbox
Mailer3.1.3 Mailer
mailman4.7.2 External Actions
Mailutils configuration file2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
mailutils.dictDescription
mailutils.rc2.2 Mailutils Configuration File
Message3.1.4 Message
MeTA12.10.3 Using maidag with MeTA1.
Meyering, JimB.10 Authors of get_date
minutes, time zone correction byB.3 Time of day items
month names in date stringsB.2 Calendar date items
months, written-outB.1 General date syntax
multi-line comments2.2.1.1 Comments
multiline strings, sieveLexical Tokens
N
namespace2.13.1 Namespace
numbers, sieveLexical Tokens
numbers, written-outB.1 General date syntax
O
ordinal numbersB.1 General date syntax
P
Pinard, F.B.10 Authors of get_date
plus expansionDescription
preprocessor, sieve4.3 Preprocessor
Programs2. Mailutils Programs
pure numbers in date stringsB.7 Pure numbers in date strings
Q
quoted string2.2.1.2 Statements
R
relative items in date stringsB.6 Relative items in date strings
reverse indexingDescription
S
Salz, RichB.10 Authors of get_date
Scheme3.3 Mailutils to Scheme Interface
Sendmail2.10.1 Using maidag with Sendmail.
server configuration, general2.2.11.1 General Server Configuration
server settings, configuration2.2.11 Server Settings
server statement2.2.11.2 Server Statement
Sieve Language4. Sieve Language
Sieve Library3.4 Sieve Library
Sieve preprocessor statements4.3 Preprocessor
simple statements2.2.1.2 Statements
single-line comments2.2.1.1 Comments
statement, simple2.2.1.2 Statements
statements, configuration file2.2.1.2 Statements
Stream3.1.9 Stream
string list, sieveLexical Tokens
string, quoted2.2.1.2 Statements
string, unquoted2.2.1.2 Statements
strings, sieveLexical Tokens
T
test, sieve4.2.4 Tests and Conditions
test, sieve4.6 Tests
time of day itemB.3 Time of day items
time zone correctionB.3 Time of day items
time zone itemB.1 General date syntax
time zone itemB.4 Time zone items
U
URL3.1.14 URL
Using ‘libmu_auth3.2.6 Using ‘libmu_auth’ in Your Programs
Jump to:   A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U  

Footnotes

(1)

Rmail does not use this feature

(2)

The exact location is determined at configuration time by setting environment variable DEFAULT_CUPS_CONFDIR. On most sites running

 
./configure DEFAULT_CUPS_CONFDIR=/etc/cups

should be recommended.

About This Document

This document was generated by Sergey Poznyakoff on December, 14 2010 using texi2html 1.78.

The buttons in the navigation panels have the following meaning:

Button Name Go to From 1.2.3 go to
Back Back Previous section in reading order 1.2.2
Forward Forward Next section in reading order 1.2.4
FastBack FastBack Beginning of this chapter or previous chapter 1
Up Up Up section 1.2
FastForward FastForward Next chapter 2
Contents Contents Table of contents  
Index Index Index  
[ ? ] About About (help)  

where the Example assumes that the current position is at Subsubsection One-Two-Three of a document of the following structure: